C/V (2012) - Car RAM - Free user manual and instructions

Make	RAM
Model	C/V (Cargo Van) 2012
Type	Full-size cargo van
Seating Capacity	Up to 8 (depending on configuration)
Transmission	6-speed automatic
Drive	Rear-wheel drive
Fuel Type	Unleaded gasoline
Steering	Power rack-and-pinion
Brakes	Front and rear disc brakes with ABS
Airbags	Advanced front airbags, side curtain airbags, seat-mounted side airbags, driver knee airbag
Security System	Sentry Key immobilizer and vehicle security alarm
Keyless Entry	Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) with key fob
Power Accessories	Power windows, power sliding doors, power liftgate (optional)
Climate Control	Automatic temperature control (optional)
Audio System	AM/FM radio, CD player, satellite radio (optional)
Cruise Control	Electronic speed control
Tire Pressure Monitoring	TPMS with warning light
Maintenance Interval	Oil change every 6000 miles or 6 months (severe conditions)
Child Safety	Child protection door locks and LATCH system

Frequently Asked Questions - C/V (2012) RAM

How do I use the remote start feature?

Press and release the REMOTE START button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The doors will lock, parking lights flash, horn chirps, and engine starts for a 15-minute cycle. To drive, insert key fob and turn to ON/RUN before cycle ends.

How do I reset the oil change indicator?

Turn the ignition to ON (not running). Slowly press and release the accelerator pedal three times within 10 seconds. The indicator will reset. Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) for confirmation.

How can I program an additional key fob?

Programming requires a dealer visit. You must provide all existing key fobs and the four-digit PIN. The dealer will program a blank key fob to your vehicle.

What is the correct procedure for engaging the child safety locks on sliding doors?

Open the sliding door and slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward (toward vehicle) to engage. The door can then only be opened from outside.

How do I replace the battery in the key fob?

Remove the emergency key by sliding the latch. Pry open the key fob halves using a flat screwdriver. Replace with a CR2032 battery, matching the + sign. Snap halves together.

What is the towing capacity of the RAM C/V?

The towing capacity varies by configuration. With proper equipment, it can tow up to 5000 lbs (2268 kg). Always consult the owner's manual for specific limits.

How do I use the power liftgate?

Press the LIFTGATE button twice within five seconds on the key fob to open or close. Alternatively, use the overhead console button or the rear interior switch. Ensure the path is clear.

How do I activate the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) for a child seat?

Buckle the seat belt, then pull the shoulder webbing all the way out until you hear a click. Allow it to retract; you'll hear a ratcheting sound. The belt is now locked. To disengage, unbuckle and let it fully retract.

How do I check and adjust tire pressure?

Check pressure when tires are cold. Refer to the tire placard on the driver's door for recommended pressure. Use a reliable gauge. The TPMS will warn if pressure is low.

How do I reset the Active Head Restraints (AHR) after deployment?

Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat. Pull down and rearward to engage the locking mechanism. The front half should lock into the back. If difficulty, see an authorized dealer.

USER MANUAL C/V (2012) RAM

Stylized emblem of a ram's head with symmetrical wings and metallic rim (no text or symbols)

RAM

2012

OWNER'S MANUAL

RAM CV

Cargo Van

VEHICLES SOLD INCANADA

WithrespecttoanyVehiclesSoldinCanada, thename ChryslerGroupLLC shall bedeemedtobedeleted and the nameChryslerCanadaInc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVINGANDALCOHOL

Drunkendrivingisoneofthemostfrequentcausesof accidents.

Yourdrivingabilitycanbeseriouslyimpairedwithblood alcohollevelsfarbelowthelegalminimum.Ifyouaredrinking,don'tdrive.Ridewithadesignatednon-drinking driver,callacab,afriend,orusepublictransportation.

WARNING!

Drivingafterdrinkingcanleadtoanaccident.Your perceptionsarelesssharp,yourreflexesareslower, andyourjudgmentisimpairedwhenyouhavebeen drinking.Neverdrinkandthendrive.

Thismanualillustratesanddescribestheoperationof featuresandequipmentthatareeitherstandardoroptional onthisvehicle. Thismanualmayalsoincludeadescription offeaturesandequipmentthatarenolongeravailableor werenotorderedonthisvehicle. Pleasedisregardany featuresandequipmentdescribedinthismanualthatare notonthisvehicle.

ChryslerGroupLLCreservestherighttomakechangesin designandspecifications,and/ormakeadditionstoor improvementstoitsproductswithoutimposinganyobligationuponitselftoinstallthemonproductspreviously manufactured.

Copyright©2011ChryslerGroupLLC

SECTIONPAGE

TABLEOFCONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION 3 1
2 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE 1053
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2794
5 STARTINGANDOPERATING 4155
6 WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES 5116
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5437
8 MAINTENANCESCHEDULES 5938
9 IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE 609g
10 INDEX 61910

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

■Introduction.... 4
■How To Use This Manual.... 4
■Warnings And Cautions....6

■Vehicle Identification Number 6
■Vehicle Modifications/Alterations....7

[Non-Text]

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should bestored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOWTOUSETHISMANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:

6INTRODUCTION

WARNINGSANDCAUTIONS

This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLEIDENTIFICATIONNUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears stamped on the right sliding door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

Close-up of a car's side panel corner with a white arrow pointing to a small object, no visible text or symbols.

VehicleIdentificationNumber

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with a magnified circular detail highlighting a specific vehicle (no text or symbols present)

VEHICLEMODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Anymodificationsoralterationstothisvehiclecould seriouslyaffectitsroadworthinessandsafetyand mayleadtoanaccidentresultinginseriousinjuryor death.

StampedVINLocation

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

CONTENTS

■A Word About Your Keys....12

□Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)....12

■Sentry Key ^ .... 1 5

□Replacement Keys.... 16

■Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . 1 7

□Rearming Of The System.... 17

■Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ..... 1 9

■ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 20

□ Using The RKE Transmitter 20

■ Remote Starting System — If Equipped ..... 29

□ How To Use Remote Start 29

■Door Locks 32

□Manual Door Locks 32

□Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 3 4

■Windows.... 36

□ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped ..... 36

□Power Windows.... 36

■Occupant Restraints 52

□Lap/Shoulder Belts 55

□Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ..... 6 2

□Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped 62

□Energy Management Feature....63

□Seat Belt Pretensioners....64

□Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If Equipped.... 6 4

□Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) 68

□Seat Belt Lock Out....69

□Seat Belts And Pregnant Women....69

□Seat Belt Extender 70

□Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags .... 7 0

□Air Bag System Components....72

□Advanced Front Air Bag Features....73

□ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 76

□Event Data Recorder (EDR) 84

□Child Restraints 85

■Commercial Cargo Vehicles (No Factory Installed Rear Seats) — If Equipped ..... 9 5
□Restraining Infants And Small Children In Commercial Cargo Vehicles....97
■Engine Break-In Recommendations....98
■Safety Tips 99
□Transporting Passengers....99

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 11

□Exhaust Gas 100
□Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle.... 10
☐Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle.... 103

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up.

WirelessIgnitionNode(WIN)

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.

1 — OFF
2 — ACCESSORY
3—ON/RUN
4 — START

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE13

KeyFob

The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square end of the Key Fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

Top-down view of a car's side panel and its blade (no text or symbols visible)

020207436

EmergencyKeyRemoval

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side up.

NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.

CAUTION!

• If your vehicle battery becomes slow or dead, your KeyFob will become locked in the ignition.
• DonotattempttoremovetheKeyFobwhilein thiscondition,damagecouldoccurtotheKeyFob orignitionmodule.Onlyremovetheemergency keyforlockingandunlockingthedoors.
• LeavetheKeyFobintheignitionandeither:
• JumpStartthevehicle.
• Chargethebattery.

WARNING!

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovethekey fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.
• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.
• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle, and donotleavetheignitionintheACCorON/RUN position. Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormovethevehicle.
• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

An unlocked carisan invitation to thieves. Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-IgnitionReminder

Opening the driver's door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position.

SENTRYKEY®

The Sentry Key ^® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

The SentryKey® Immobilizersystemisnotcompatiblewithsomeafter-marketremotestartingsystems. Useofthesesystemsmayresultinvehiclestarting problemsandlossofsecurityprotection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

ReplacementKeys

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

AlwaysremovetheKeyFobsfromthevehicleand lockalldoorswhenleavingthevehicleunattended.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs. Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer.

CustomerKeyProgramming

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.

GeneralInformation

The Sentry Key ^® system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
- This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

VEHICLESECURITYALARM—IFEQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE17

provides both audible and visible signals, for the first three minutes, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For an additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.

RearmingOfTheSystem

The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.

ToArmTheSystem

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And Operating" for further information).

• Make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF" and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
• Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• If any doors are open, close them.

ToDisarmTheSystem

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.

- Insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position.

NOTE:

• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

TamperAlert

If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.

SecuritySystemManualOverride

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.

ILLUMINATEDENTRY—IFEQUIPPED

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to "Mirrors" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the "Dome ON" position (extreme top position).
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).

20THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

REMOTEKEYLESSENTRY(RKE)—IFEQUIPPED

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.

Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle. Vehicles built without the powered options will be equipped from the factory with three-button RKE transmitters, and those built with power options will be equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.

UsingTheRKETransmitter

Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN-LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.

Top-down view of a car's side panel with icons for parking, parking, and parking door (no text or symbols)

020207434

KeyFobWithThree-ButtonRKETransmitter

Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions that allow the same basic operation as the three-button, but may also be used to operate the power liftgate

(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature (optional). Some features can be programmed to the customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or sound horn on LOCK.

020207433

KeyFobWithSeven-ButtonRKETransmitter

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE21

RemoteUnlockDoorsAndLiftgate

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's side or twice to unlock all doors and liftgate. This will also turn on the Illuminated Entry system.

RemoteKeyUnlockOnFirstPress

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's side, or all doors, on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

- For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following steps:
• Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle.
• Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
• Release both buttons at the same time.
• Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed.
• Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

RemoteLockDoorsAndLiftgate

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

SoundHornWithRemoteLock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

- For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

- For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:

1. Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle.
2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE23

1. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

UsingThePanicAlarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).

24 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

NOTE:

• When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF) noises of the system.
• The Panic Alarm cannot be activated if the engine is running.

PowerOpen/ClosePowerLiftgate—IfEquipped

Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate. If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.

The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead console.

If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only. The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.

If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, using RKE transmitter to open the power liftgate does not unlock the vehicle or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

PowerOpen/CloseLeftPowerSlidingDoor—If Equipped

Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open position.

If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, pressing the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vehicle Security Alarm.

PowerOpen/CloseRightPowerSlidingDoor—If Equipped

Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open position.

If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, pressing the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice unlocks the power sliding door and disarms Vehicle Security Alarm.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE25

TurnOffFlashLightsWithRKELock—If Equipped

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:

• Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle.

1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

ProgrammingAdditionalTransmitters

If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.

TransmitterBatteryReplacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

• Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

Top-down diagram of a car's side panel and its blade, showing internal compartments and a separate blade (no text or symbols)

020207436

EmergencyKeyRemoval

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE27

1. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.

Illustration of a handheld electric shaver with a metallic blade and handle (no text or symbols)

021334199

InsertingEmergencyKeyIntoSlot

3D rendered illustration of a mechanical component with internal channels and a labeled page number (021334198), no readable text or symbols on the main subject.

SeparatingRKETransmitter

1. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

2. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
- This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions.

1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of the battery is approximately three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

REMOTESTARTINGSYSTEM—IFEQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range.

HowToUseRemoteStart

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will Remote Start:

• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE29

• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
  • RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
  • Vehicle theft alarm not active

The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
- Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
- Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset

The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.

ToEnterRemoteStartMode

Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will automatically lock the doors.
• The park lights will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minute cycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position.

ToEntertheVehicleAfterRemoteStart

To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the Key Fob

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE31

into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON/RUN position, otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of 15-minute cycle.

ToExitRemoteStartModeAndDriveTheVehicle

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
• The message "Remote Start Active — Key To Run" will display in the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to ON/RUN position. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" for further information.

Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur:

• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
  • Any engine warning lights come on
• Low Fuel Light turns on
• The hood is opened
  • The hazard switch is pressed
  • The shift lever is moved out of PARK
• The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute cycle

ToTurnOffTheEngineWhileInRemoteStart Mode

Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote Start button to shut down the engine for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

WhenToResetRemoteStart

The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.

DOORLOCKS

ManualDoorLocks

Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock knobs on each door trim panel.

If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and side panels with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols present)

ManualDoorLockSlidingDoorLock

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE33

If the lock knob is rearward when you shut either side sliding door, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

Close-up of a car door handle and side panel with a black arrow pointing to the door (no text or symbols visible)

A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

DriverPowerDoorLockSwitches

If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from

accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.

FrontPassengerPowerDoorSwitches

1 - Window Open/Close 2 - Power Door Locks

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE35

If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding door is open, the sliding door will lock.

AutomaticDoorLocks—IfEquipped

When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.

UnlockDoorsAutomaticallyOnExit—If Equipped

The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors closed).

36THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks (lock or unlock).

On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit features in accordance with local laws.

WINDOWS

PowerVentWindows—IfEquipped

The Power Vent Window Switch located on the driver's door trim panel allows the driver to operate the two vent windows from the driver's seat.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and door (no visible text or symbols)

PowerVentWindowSwitchOpen/Close

PowerWindows

You can control either the front or rear windows using switches located on the driver's door trim panel. The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Driver'sPowerWindowSwitches
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE37

PowerWindowLockoutSwitch—IfEquipped The driver may lock out the rear power windows by depressing the bar switch just below the power window switches.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

PowerWindowLockoutSwitch

There is a single switch on the front passenger's door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and a set of switches that lock and unlock all doors. The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

FrontPassengerPowerDoorSwitches

1 - Window Open/Close
2 - Power Door Locks

Auto-DownFeature—IfEquipped

The front window switches may be equipped with an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop.

The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting) after the ignition switch has been turned to OFF. Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE39

AutoUpFeatureWithAnti-PinchProtection—If Equipped

The front driver and front passenger switches may be equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop.

NOTE:

- If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.

- Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually.

WARNING!

Thereisnoanti-pinchprotectionwhenthewindow isalmostclosed.Toavoidpersonalinjurybesureto clearyourarms,hands,fingersandalobjectsfrom thewindowpathbeforeclosing.

AutoUpReset—IfEquipped

To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.

2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

SlidingSideDoorPowerWindowSwitch—If Equipped

Second row passengers may open and close the sliding door window by a single switch on the door handle assembly.

The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

NOTE: The switches will not operate if the driver has activated the Power Window Lockout.

Close-up of a car door handle with a black arrow pointing to a switch (no text or symbols visible)

SlidingDoorPowerWindowSwitch

NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open, stopping several inches above the window sill.

WindBuffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE41

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear windows are open and buffeting occurs, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

SLIDINGSIDEDOOR

The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open latch in order to close the door.

To keep your door operating properly, observe the following guidelines:

• Always open the door smoothly.

• Avoid high impacts against the door stop when opening the door. This is very important when your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction.
• There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the exterior handle.

Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched anytime the vehicle is in motion.

NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door.

PowerSlidingSideDoor—IfEquipped

The power sliding door may be opened or closed manually or by using the buttons on the RKE transmitter, overhead console switch, or rear door switch. Pulling the inside or outside power sliding door handle will also power open or close the power sliding door.

NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a second time while the sliding door is power opening or power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or closed manually.

Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the door.

There are power sliding side door switches located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console

for the driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once will open the power sliding door. If the switch is pressed while the door is under a power cycle, the door will reverse direction.

NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked before the power sliding door switches will operate.

Close-up of a car door handle with a black arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)

PowerSlidingDoorSwitch

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE43

If the inside or outside door handles are used while the power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding door feature will be canceled and will go into manual mode.

To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door master lock button, located in the overhead console, to disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passengers.

NOTE:

- The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding door if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h). To close the power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph (0 km/h), the brake must be pressed.

• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
• If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or close position, it will fully open when a power sliding door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it is fully open and then press the switch again.
• If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop, the power sliding door motor will make a clicking sound until the door has no further movement. This clicking sound can be stopped by pulling the inside or outside handle. If this condition occurs, no damage is done to the power sliding door motor. The power sliding door must be opened or closed manually.

WARNING!

You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door. Makes sure the door path is clear before closing the door.

PowerSlidingSideDoorOpenFlash

The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be entering or exiting the vehicle.

The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure:

1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch.

2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/RUN to OFF five times ending in the ON/RUN position (donotstartthe engine).

3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZ-ARD switch ON.

4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.

You can turn the feature back on by repeating the previous procedure.

PowerSlidingSideDoorMasterLockSwitch

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches and handles may be overridden by pressing the OFF side of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front overhead console.

When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the OFF position, the power sliding side door may not be opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the b-pillar trim panel, just in front of the sliding door or activating the inside power sliding door handle.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE45

81bbf7ac

OverheadConsolePowerSlidingDoorMasterSwitch

1 — Left Sliding Door 3 — Right Sliding Door
2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system.

NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

ToEngagetheChildProtectionDoorLock

1. Open the sliding side door.

2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward (toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.

Close-up of a car door panel showing a switch, lock, and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

ChildProtectionDoorLock

1. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.

NOTE:

- After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE47

• When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position) the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
• The power sliding side door will operate from the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional operation of the powers sliding door from therear seats, press the "OFF" MasterLockOutSwitchlocated in the front overhead console, next to the driver.

WARNING!

Avoidtrappinganyoneinthevehicleinacollision. Rememberthattheslidingdoorscanonlybeopened fromtheoutsidedoorhandleortheswitcheslocated onthetrimpaneljustinfrontofthepowersliding doorwhentheChildProtectionDoorLocksare engaged.

ToDisengagetheChildProtectionDoorLock

1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward (away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if equipped).

• After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
• The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The power sliding door will operate from the outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the overhead console, or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door when the shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock lever position.

LIFTGATE

On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors.

To open the liftgate, press the liftgate release handle located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.

Front view of a silver car trunk with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)

LiftgateHandleLocation

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE49

PowerLiftgate—IfEquipped

The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds, a second time, will close the liftgate.

The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the button located on the overhead console.

81bbf7ac

OverheadConsoleMasterPowerSwitch

1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door
2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock

The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button, located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button cannot be used to open the liftgate.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, dashboard, and side arm (no visible text or symbols)

RearPowerLiftgateSwitch

When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash and several audible beeps will occur to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing.

WARNING!

Duringpoweroperation, personal injury or cargo damagemay occur. Ensure the lift gatetravelpathis clear. Makes sure the lift gate is closed and latched before driving away.

NOTE:

- If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.

• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
• During power operation, whether liftgate is fully open or fully closed, the liftgate chime will beep several times indicating power operation is in progress.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open or close positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must be opened or closed manually.
• If the liftgate release button is activated while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE51

• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below -12^ ( -24^ ) or temperatures above 143^ ( 62^ ). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate buttons.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually.

WARNING!

- Drivingwiththeliftgateopencanallowpoison-ousexhaustgasesintoyourvehicle.Youandyour passengerscouldbeinjuredbythesefumes.Keep theliftgateclosedwhenyouareoperatingthe vehicle.

(Continued)

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

- If you are required to drivewith the lift gate open, makes sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blowers switch it at high speed. Donot us there circulation mode.

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.

OCCUPANTRESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions

• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger

• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into the head restraint) — if equipped
  • Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag

• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) that span the front, second, and third row seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
  • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupant
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event

- All seat belt systems (except the driver's and third row center) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children12yearsoldandundershouldalwaysride buckledupinarearseat.

WARNING!

Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger AdvancedFrontAirBag.Anairbagdeployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")

You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

1. Alloccupantsshouldalwaysweartheirlapand shoulderbeltsproperly.

2. Thedriverandfrontpassengerseatsshouldbe movedbackasfaraspracticaltoallowtheAdvanced FrontAirBagsroomtoinflate.

3. Donotleanagainstthedoororwindow.Ifyour vehiclehassideairbags,anddeploymentoccurs,the sideairbagswillinflateforcefullyintothespace betweenyouandthedoor.

4. If the air bagsystem in this vehicle need stobe modified to accommodate disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phonenumbers are provided under "If You Need Assistance".

WARNING!

- Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagswork withyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In somecollisions,theairbagswon'tdeployatall. Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Beingtooclosetothesteeringwheelorinstrument panelduringAdvancedFrontAirBagdeployment couldcauseseriousinjury,includingdeath.Air Bagsneedroomtoinflate.Sitback,comfortably extendingyourarmstoreachthesteeringwheelor instrumentpanel.
• SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)andSeat-MountedSideAirBags(SAB)alsoneedroomtoinflate.Donotleanagainstthe doororwindow.Situprightinthecenterofthe seat.
• Inacollision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always besure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

55

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Lap/ShoulderBelts

All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with

you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideor outsideofvehicle. Inacollision, peopleriding in theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured or killed.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Wearingaseatbeltincorrectlyisdangerous.Seat beltsaredesignedtogoaroundthelargebonesof yourbody.Thesearethestrongestpartsofyour bodyandcantaketheforcesofacollisionthebest.
• Wearingyourbeltinthewrongplacecouldmake yourinjuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmight sufferinternalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideout ofpartofthebelt.Followtheseinstructionsto wearyourseatbeltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengerssafe,too.
• Twopeopleshouldneverbebeltedintoasingle seatbelt.Peoplebeltedtogethercancrashintoone anotherinacollision,hurtingoneanotherbadly. Neverusealap/shoulderbeltorlapbeltformore thanoneperson,nomatterwhattheirsize.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE57

Lap/ShoulderBeltOperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

PullingOutBeltandLatchPlate

• Abeltthatiswornunderyourarmisdangerous. Yourbodycouldstriketheinsidesurfacesofthe vehicleinacollision,increasingheadandneck injury.Abeltwornunderthearmcancause internalinjuries.Ribsaren'tasstrongasshoulder bones.Wearthebeltoveryourshouldersothat yourstrongestboneswilltaketheforceina collision.

• Ashoulderbeltplacedbehindyouwillnotprotect youfrominjuryduringacollision.Youaremore likelytohityourheadinacollisionifyoudonot wearyourshoulderbelt.Thelapandshoulderbelt aremeanttobeusedtogether.

• When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click".

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

InsertingLatchPlateIntoBuckle

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE59

WARNING!

• Abelthatisbuckledintothewrongbucklewill notprotectyouproperly. Thelapportioncouldride toohighonyourbody,possiblycausinginternal injuries. Alwaysbuckleyourbeltintothebuckle nearestyou.
• Abelthatistooloosewillnotprotectyou properly.Inasuddenstopyoucouldmovetoofar forward,increasingthepossibilityofinjury.Wear yourseatbeltsnugly.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

RemovingSlackFromBelt

1. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

WARNING!

• Alapbeltworntoohighcanincreasetheriskof internalinjuryinacollision.Thebeltforceswon'tbe atthestronghipandpelvicbones,butacrossyour abdomen.Alwayswearthelapbeltaslowaspossibleandkeepitsnug.

• Atwistedbeltmaynotprotectyouproperly.Ina collision,itcouldevencutintoyou.Besurethebelt isstraight.Ifyoucan'tstraightenabeltinyour vehicle,takeittoyourauthorizeddealerimmediatelyandhaveitfixed.

• Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

• To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Do notdisassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbelt assembliesmustbereplacedafteracollisionifthey havebeendamaged(bentretractor,tornwebbing, etc.).

ThirdRowCenterShoulderBeltInstructions

The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.

Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a "click".

Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." The retractor should withdraw any slack in the belt.

To release the small latch plate, position the end of the large latch plate against the red button on the small latch plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the headliner.

AdjustableUpperShoulderBeltAnchorage

In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by

pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the anchorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assembly.

Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with directional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

AdjustableAnchorage

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

SeatBeltsInPassengerSeatingPositions

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child Restraint" section. The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position.

	Driver Center Passenger
First Row N	A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR	N/A ALR
Third Row	ALR	Cinch	ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable

• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage:

Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

AutomaticLockingRetractorMode(ALR)—If Equipped

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE63

anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.

HowToEngageTheAutomaticLockingMode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

HowToDisengageTheAutomaticLockingMode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• Thebeltandretractorassemblymustbereplaced iftheseatbeltassemblyAutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)featureoranyotherseatbeltfunctionisnotworkingproperlywhencheckedaccordingtotheproceduresintheServiceManual.
• Failuretoreplacethebeltandretractorassembly couldincreaseetheriskofinjuryincollisions.

EnergyManagementFeature

This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant's chest.

The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

SupplementalActiveHeadRestraints(AHR)—If Equipped

These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

HowTheActiveHeadRestraints(AHR)Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.

NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE65

022607508

ActiveHeadRestraint(AHR)Components

1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)

2 — Seatback

3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)

4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes

Allooccupants, including the driver, should not operate vehicle or sitin vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to "Adjusting Active Head Restraints" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".

ResettingActiveHeadRestraints(AHR)

If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, you must reset the head restraint on the driver's and front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step three of the resetting procedure).

1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.

Illustration of a person sitting in a chair with hands on their head, no text or symbols present

HandPositioningPointsOnAHR

1. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position.
2. Pull downthen rearwardtowards the rear of the vehicle then downto engage the locking mechanism.

1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE67

3D rendered mechanical component with a black arrow labeled '3' pointing to a specific part (no text or symbols beyond the number)

3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism

1. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half.

3D rendered image of a car seatbelt with a handle and seat (no text or symbols)

AHRInResetPosition

022607494

NOTE:

- If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.

- For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.

EnhancedSeatBeltUseReminderSystem (BeltAlert®)

BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened.

The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder

Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual notification.

The front passenger seat BeltAlert ^® is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert ^® may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert ^® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert ^® .

NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's or front passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.

SeatBeltLockOut

The center rear seat belt system has a lock out feature that will not allow you to extract the center webbing unless the rear seat upper latch is engaged.

SeatBeltsAndPregnantWomen

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!

Usingaseatbeltextenderwhennotneededcan increasetheriskofinjuryinacollision.Onlyuse whenthelapbeltisnotlongenoughwhenitisworn lowandsnug,andintherecommendedseating positions.Removeandstoretheextenderwhennot needed.

SupplementalRestraintSystem(SRS)—AirBags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column.

AdvancedFrontAirBagAndKneeBolsterLocations

1 — Driver And Passenger

2 — Knee Bolster

Advanced Front Air Bags

3 — Supplemental Driver Side

Knee Air Bag

NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags.

The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact. The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.

NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

AirBagSystemComponents

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
- Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
- Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
- Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE73

AdvancedFrontAirBagFeatures

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

WARNING!

• Noobjectsshouldbeplacedoverorneartheair bagontheinstrumentpanel,becauseanysuch objectscouldcauseharmifthevehicleisina collisionsevereenoughtocausetheairbagto inflate.
• Donotputanythingonoraroundtheairbag coversorattempttoopenthemmanually.Youmay damagetheairbagsandyoucouldbeinjured because the airbags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.
• Donotdrill, cutortamper with the kneeebolsterin anyway.
• Donotmountanyaccessoriestothekneebolster suchasalarmlights, stereos, citizenbandradios, etc.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.

Car seat assembly diagram showing a seatbelt being adjusted to the side of the seat (no text or symbols)

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBagLabel

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only.

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)

SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.

NOTE:

- Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE75

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.

The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection.

WARNING!

- If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), donot stack luggage or other cargroup highenought block the location of the SABIC. The are a where the side curtain air bag is located should remain free from any obstructions.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandthesideairbags;theperformancecouldbeadverselyaffectedand/orobjects couldbepushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.

SupplementalDriverSideKneeAirBag

The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.

KneeImpactBolster

The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the front passenger, and position the front occupant for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.

(Continued)

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bags work with the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag and the passenger side knee bolster to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

AirBagDeploymentSensorsAndControls

OccupantRestraintController(ORC)

The ORCis part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensor's signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air bags, SABs, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity and type of impact.

Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.

The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE77

Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup.

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

IgnoringtheAirBagWarningLightinyourinstrumentpanelcouldmeanyouwon'thavetheairbags toprotectyouinacollision.Ifthelightdoesnotcome onasabulbcheckwhentheignitionisfirstturned on,staysonafteryoustartthevehicle,orifitcomes onasyoudrive,haveanauthorizeddealerservicethe airbagsystemimmediately.

DriverAndPassengerAdvancedFrontAirBag InflatorUnits

The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

SupplementalDriverSideKneeAirBagInflator Unit

The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental

Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds. The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag gas is vented through small vent holes in the side of the air bag.

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBag(SAB) InflatorUnits

The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.

The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision.

Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 79

in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)InflatorUnits

During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you

80THINGSTOKNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.

FrontAndSideImpactSensors

In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystem

In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.

IfADeploymentOccurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

- The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE81

- As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

• Modificationstoanypartoftheairbagsystem couldcauseittofailwhenyouneedit.Youcould beinjurediftheairbagsystemisnotthereto protectyou.Donotmodifythecomponentsor wiring,includingaddinganykindofbadgesor stickerstothesteeringwheelhubtrimcoverorthe upperrightsideoftheinstrumentpanel.Donot modifythefrontbumper,vehiclebodystructure, oraddaftermarketsidestepsorrunningboards.
• Itisdangeroustotrytorepairanypartoftheair bagsystemyourself.Besuretotellanyonewho worksonyourvehiclethatithasanairbagsystem.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotattempttomodifyanypartofyourairbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bags systems service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion need stobe serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), tak the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories maybe used. If its necessary to modify the air bags system for person with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

AirBagWarningLight

You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on for approximately four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the approximate four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

EventDataRecorder(EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

- How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
  • How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

ChildRestraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

Inacollision, an unrestrained child, even atiny baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could no hold the child, no matter how strongly you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicles should be in proper restraint for the child's size.

InfantsAndChildRestraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.

WARNING!

Rearward-facingchildseatsmustneverbeusedin thefrontseatofvehiclewiththefrontpassengerair bag.Anairbagdeploymentcouldcausesevere injuryordeathtoinfantsinthisposition.

OlderChildrenAndChildRestraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held

in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to "Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)".

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.

ChildrenTooLargeForBoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 87

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn't help, move the child to the center rear seating position and use both the lap and shoulder belt. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.

NOTE: For additional information, referto www.seatcheck.orgorcall1-866-SEATCHECK.CanadianresidentsshouldrefertoTransportCanada'sweb-siteforadditionalinformation:http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

• Improperinstallationcanleadtofailureofan infantorchildrestraint.Itcouldcomelooseina collision.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthemanufacturer'sdirectionsexactlywheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.
• Arearward-facingchildrestraintshouldonlybe usedinarearseat.Arearward-facingchildrestraintinthefrontseatmaybestruckbyadployingpassengerairbagwhichmaycausesevereor fatalinjurytotheinfant.

Herearesometipsongettingthemostoutofyourchild restraint:

- Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that

you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it, before you buy it.

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child's weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer's directions.

WARNING!

When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with these seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Don't leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seat backs and causes serious personal injury.

InstallingTheChildRestraintSystem

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE89

In general, you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.

Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.

WARNING!

Improperinstallationofachildrestrainttothe LATCHanchoragescanleadtofailureofaninfantor childrestraint.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthemanufacturer'sdirectionsexactly wheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.

Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed on all second-row seats and in the center position on all third row fold-in-floor seats. Second-row seats also feature tether strap anchorages, located in the rear surface of the seatback. In addition, all third row fold-in-floor seats are equipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the center seating position.

NOTE:

• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.
• If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.

InstallingtheLowerAttachments:

1. The vehicle lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.

Interior view of a car seat with two black arrows pointing to specific areas (no text or symbols visible)

LATCHAnchorage(SecondRowAnchorageShown)

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE91

Interior view of a car seat with two upward-pointing arrows indicating seat positions (no text or symbols)

LATCHAnchorage (ThirdRow60/40AnchorageShown)

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraint attachment straps (reference the child restraint seat instructions) to ease the installation.

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: It is recommended to loosen the top tether strap and route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors so the top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicle seat and child restraint.
3. Attach the lower child restraint attachment straps to the vehicle's lower anchor bars. Ensure that the lower attachment strap is firmly engaged and that the hook is secure.
4. Tighten the lower attachment strap while firmly pushing the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. Remove all slack in the lower attachment straps. Reference the child restraint instructions for information on properly removing slack.

InstallingtheTopTetherStrap (witheitherLowerAnchorsorVehicleSeatBelt):

1. Route the top tether strap under the adjustable head restraint between the steel posts.
2. Provide enough slack (reference child restraint instructions) for the tether strap to reach the tether anchor located near the bottom of the seat back.
3. Clip tether hook to tether anchor. Ensure that the hook is firmly engaged and secure.
4. Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according to child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

NOTE: The top tether strap is always to be secured, regardless of if the child restraint is installed with the lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt.

Back view of a car seat with a vertical guide bar and arrow indicating left side (no text or symbols)

RearSeatTetherStrapMounting (SecondRowAnchorageShown)

022635284

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE93

Interior view of a vehicle showing rear seats with seatbars and a black arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols)

LATCHAnchorage (ThirdRow60/40AnchorageShown)

WARNING!

Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe child.Useonlytheanchorpositionsdirectlybehind thechildseattosecureachildrestrainttoptether strap.

InstallingTheChildRestraintUsingTheVehicle SeatBelts

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate to secure a Child Restraint System (CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to

"Automatic Locking Mode" description under "Seat Belts in Passenger Seating Positions" section. The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate.

	Driver Center Passenger
	CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock
First Row	N/A	N/A	ALR
Second Row	ALR	N/A	ALR
Third Row	ALR	Cinch	ALR

• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:

1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE95

then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

1. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate:

1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate, first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

TransportingPets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

COMMERCIALCARGOVEHICLES(NOFACTORY INSTALLEDREARSEATS)—IFEQUIPPED

Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat should be moved to the full rearward position and the child must be in a proper restraint system based on its age, size and weight.

NEVERcarryachildinarearfacinginfantcarrierin avehiclewithoutrearseats.Inanaccident,serious injuryordeathmayoccurfromthedeployingpas- sengerairbag.

Interior view of a car showing two passenger seats with wheels and a belt, no visible text or symbols

CommercialChildRestraintTetherAnchor

This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger seat. Use thistetheranchortosecureonlyforward-facingchildrestraintsequippedwithanuppertether strap.

WARNING!

Rearward-facinginfantrestraintsmustneverbese- curedinthepassengerseatofavehiclewitha passengerairbag.Inanaccident,apassengerairbag maydeploycausingsevereinjuryordeathtoinfants ridinginrearward-facinginfantrestraints.

RestrainingInfantsAndSmallChildrenIn CommercialCargoVehicles

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is correct for your child:

• The forward-facing child seat is for children from about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year old.
• A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be used for children who are too heavy for a rearward-facing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A COMMERCIAL CARGO VEHICLE. When a convertible seat is properly installed facing forward, the vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rearmostposition.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

97

- Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

TetherInstallationForCommercialCargoVehicles To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the vehicle, follow the instructions shown:

1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer's directions for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the extended tether strap.

1. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
   NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is centered between the headrest supports underneath the head rest.
2. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
3. Following the child seat manufacturer's instructions, tighten the child restraint tether strap.
4. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other condition that might affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement part.

WARNING!

Thevehicletetheranchorisdesignedtobeusedwith achildrestraintonly.Itshouldnotbeusedforany otherpurpose.Beforeuse,inspectthetetheranchor strapfornicks,abrasions,discoloration,andloose threads.Iftheseoranyotherconditionthatmight affecttheperformanceofthestrapisobserved,DO NOTUSEthatstrap.Personalinjurymayresult. Contactyourauthorizeddealershipforareplacement part.

ENGINEBREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle".

CAUTION!

NeveruseNon-DetergentOilorStraightMineralOil intheengineordamagemayresult.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE99

should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

SAFETYTIPS

TransportingPassengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.
• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofvehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.

(Continued)

• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

ExhaustGas

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing(CO), follow the safety tips:

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotruntheengineinaclosedgarageorin confinedareasanylongerthanneededtomove yourvehicleinoroutofthearea.
• If you are required to drivewith the trunk/lift gate open, makes sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch it at high speed. DONOT us there circulation mode.
• Ifitisnecessarytositinaparkedvehiclewiththe engineerunning,adjustyourheatingorcooling controlstoforceoutsideairintothevehicle.Set theblowerathighspeed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

SafetyChecksYouShouldMakeInsideThe Vehicle

SeatBelts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

101

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.

AirBagWarningLight

The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedalsthatcannotmovefreelycancauselossof vehiclecontrolandincreasetheriskofseriouspersonalinjury.

- Alwaysmakesurethatfloormatsareproperly attachedtothefloormatfasteners.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neverplaceorinstallfloormatsorotherfloor coveringsinthevehiclethatcannotbeproperly securedtopreventthemfrommovingandinterferingwiththepedalsortheabilitytocontrolthe vehicle.
• Neverputfloormatsorotherfloorcoveringson topofalreadyinstalledfloormats.Additional floormatsandothercoveringswillreducethesize ofthepdalareaandinterferewiththepedals.
• Checkmountingofmatsonaregularbasis.Alwaysproperlyreinstallandsecurefloormatsthat havebeenremovedforcleaning.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Alwaysmakesurethatobjectscannotfallintothe driverfootwellwhilethevehicleismoving.Objectscanbecometrappedunderthebrakepedal andacceleratorpedalcausingalossofvehicle control.
• Ifrequired,mountingpostsmustbeproperly installed,ifnotequippedfromthefactory. Failuretoproperlyfollowfloormatinstallationor mountingcancauseinterferencewiththebrake pedalandacceleratorpedaloperationcausingloss ofcontrolofthevehicle.

PeriodicSafetyChecksYouShouldMakeOutside TheVehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE103

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

DoorLatches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

FluidLeaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CONTENTS

■Mirrors.... 1 1 2

□Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . 112

□Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .. 112

□Outside Mirrors.... 1 1 3

□Driver's Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped 114

□ Outside Mirror Folding Feature ..... 114

□ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..... 114

□Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ..... 1 1 5

☐Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 1 1 6

□Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . 1 1 6

□Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .. 116

■ Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped ..... 117

□Rear Cross Path.... 1 2 3

□Modes Of Operation 124

■Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 1 2 5

□Operation.... 1 2 8

106UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

□Phone Call Features.... 1 3 5

□Uconnect™ Phone Features....138

□Advanced Phone Connectivity....142

□Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ Phone 144

□General Information.... 1 5 5

■Voice Command — If Equipped ..... 1 5 5

□Voice Command System Operation ..... 1 5 5

□Commands.... 156

□Voice Training.... 160

■Seats 160

□Power Seats — If Equipped ..... 160

□Power Lumbar — If Equipped ..... 1 6 2

□Heated Seats — If Equipped ..... 1 6 3

□Manual Front/Second Row Seat Adjuster . . . 166

□Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped ..... 1 6 7

□Head Restraints 167

□ Stow 'n Go® Seating — If Equipped ..... 172

□ Quad Seats — If Equipped 178

□ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped ..... 184

□ Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped ... 186

☐Third Row Power Folding Seat — If Equipped 186

□Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped 188

□Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks ..... 191

■Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ..... 192

□Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Transmitter To Memory 192

□Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat Only).... 195

■To Open And Close The Hood....196

■Lights 198

□Headlight Switch....198

□Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..... 199

□Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped .. 199

□Headlight Delay — If Equipped ..... 199

□Lights-On Reminder 200

□ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .... 200

□Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 2 0 0

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE 107

□Dimmer Controls 201

□ Multifunction Lever 203

□Turn Signals 203

□ Lane Change Assist 204

□High/Low Beam Switch 204

□Flash-To-Pass 204

□ Battery Protection 204

■Windshield Wiper And Washers 204

□Intermittent Wiper System....205

□Windshield Wiper Operation 206

□Windshield Washers 206

□Mist Feature 206

□Rear Wiper And Washer....206

108 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

□Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ..... 207

■Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..... 208

■Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ..... 209

■Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 2 1 0

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 2 1 2

□To Activate 213

□To Set A Desired Speed 213

□To Deactivate.... 2 1 3

□To Resume Speed....214

□To Vary The Speed Setting.... 2 1 4

□To Accelerate For Passing....214

■Parksense®Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 215

□Parksense®Sensors....216

□ Parksense® Warning Display 216
□Parksense®Display 217
□ Enabling/Disabling Parksense ^® ..... 220
□Service The Parksense®Rear Park Assist System.... 2 2 1
□ Cleaning The Parksense® System ..... 221
□ Parksense® System Usage Precautions ..... 221

Parkview®Rear Back Up Camera — If Equipped.... 2 2 4

□Turning Parkview®On Or Off — With Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . 2 2 6
□Turning Parkview® On Or Off — Without Navigation/Multimedia Radio 227

■Overhead Consoles 2 2 7

□Front Overhead Console....2 2 7

□Courtesy/Interior Lighting....228

□Sunglass Storage (Non-Sunroof Only) ..... 2 2 8

☐Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped 230

□Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped . . . . 2 3 0

■Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . 2 3 1

□Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®.... 2 3 3

□Programming A Rolling Code....234

□Programming A Non-Rolling Code ..... 2 3 6

□Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 2 3 7

□Using HomeLink®. 238

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE109

□Security 239
□ Troubleshooting Tips 239
□General Information 240

■Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 2 4 1

□Opening Sunroof — Express ..... 2 4 2
□Opening The Sunroof — Manual Mode ..... 2 4 2
□Closing Sunroof — Express ..... 2 4 2
□Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..... 2 4 2
□Pinch Protect Feature 242
□Pinch Protect Override.... 243
□ Venting Sunroof — Express 243
□Sunshade Operation....243
□Wind Buffeting 243

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

□Sunroof Maintenance.... 244

□Ignition Off Operation 244

□Sunroof Fully Closed 244

■Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped ..... 2 4 4

■Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4 9

■Cupholders 250

□Instrument Panel Cupholders 250

□Super Console — If Equipped ..... 2 5 1

□Premium Console Cupholders — If Equipped 252

□Interior Bottle Holders 252

□Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped . . . . . . 2 5 3

■Storage 254

□Glove Compartments....254

□Door Trim Panel Storage 255

□Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped . . . . 2 5 6

□Umbrella Holder.... 256

☐Second Row Seat Storage Bins — If Equipped 257

□Storage Bin Safety Warning....258

□Coat Hooks 260

□ Cargo Area Storage 260

■Console Features 261

□Basic Console 261

□Premium Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . 2 6 2

□Super Console — If Equipped ..... 2 6 6

■Cargo Area Features 268

□Rechargeable Flashlight 268

■Rear Window Features.... 269

□Rear Window Defroster....269

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE111

■Rear Load-Leveling System — If Equipped . . . 270

■Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 271

□Deploying The Crossbars....272

■Sun Screens — If Equipped ..... 2 7 7

112UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

MIRRORS

InsideDay/NightMirror—IfEquipped

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Simple illustration of a car rear mirror with an arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols)

030407085
ManualRearviewMirror

AutomaticDimmingMirror—IfEquipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light

to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate.

NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.

Front view of a car rearview mirror with a black arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols on the mirror itself)

AutomaticDimmingMirror

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE113

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleanings solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

OutsideMirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

114UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Vehiclesandotherobjectsseeninanoutsideconvex mirrorwilllooksmallerandfartherawaythanthey reallyare.Relyingtoomuchonsideconvexmirrors couldcauseyoutocollidewithanothervehicleor otherobject.Useyourinsidemirrorwhenjudging thesizeordistanceofvehicleseeninasideconvex mirror.

Driver's Automatic Dimming Mirror—If Equipped

The driver's outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.

OutsideMirrorFoldingFeature

All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and normal.

PowerMirrors—IfEquipped

The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side door trim panel.

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with a black arrow pointing to the right button (no text or symbols visible)

PowerMirrorControls

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you want to adjust.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE115

NOTE:A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.

Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.

Driver's side power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

HeatedMirrors—IfEquipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

TiltMirrorsInReverse(AvailableWithMemory SeatOnly)—IfEquipped

Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The driver's outside mirror will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver's outside mirror will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.

NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

PowerFoldingMirrors—IfEquipped

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position.

NOTE: Pressing the power folding mirror switch for more than four seconds, or if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h) will disable the folding feature.

If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), they will automatically unfold.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors—If Equipped

An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.

Top-down view of a car's front dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

Top-down diagram of three cars on a road with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present.

IlluminatedMirrorRearDetectionZones

BLINDSPOTMONITORING—IFEQUIPPED

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE117

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.

NOTE:

- The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.

- The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear.

The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE119

Side view of a silver minivan with a black arrow pointing to the side wheel (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

SensorLocations

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer to "Modes Of Operation" for further information.

Close-up of a car side mirror with a black arrow pointing downward and a small triangle symbol on the screen (no text or symbols present)

BSMWarningLight

The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries.

120UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

EnteringFromTheSide

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.

SideMonitoring

EnteringFromTheRear

Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present.

RearMonitoring

OvertakingTraffic

If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with directional arrows and a vehicle block, no text or symbols present.

Overtaking/Approaching

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE121

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present

Overtaking/Passing

122UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.

StationaryObjects

The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present

OpposingTraffic

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE123

WARNING!

TheBlindSpotMonitoringsystemisonlyanaidto helpdetectobjectsintheblindspotzones.TheBSM systemisnotdesignedtodetectpedestrians,bicyclists,oranimals.Evenifyourvehicleisequipped withtheBSMsystem,alwayscheckyourvehicle's mirrors,glanceoveryourshoulder,anduseyourturn signalbeforechanginglanes.Failureretodosocan resultinseriousinjuryordeath.

RearCrossPath

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.

Diagram showing three cars in a parking lot with directional arrows indicating movement, no text or symbols present.

RCPDetectionZones

RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.

124UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver.

When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including radio muting.

WARNING!

RCPisnotaBackUpAidsystem.Itisintendedtobe usedtohelpadriverdetectanoncomingvehicleina parkinglotsituation.Driversmustbecarefulwhen backingup,evenwhenusingRCP.Alwayscheck carefullybehindyourvehicle,lookbehindyou,and besuretocheckforpedestrians,animals,other vehicles,obstructions,andblindspotsbeforebackingup.Failureretodosocanresultinseriousinjuryor death.

ModesOfOperation

Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

BlindSpotAlert

When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.

BlindSpotAlertLights/Chime

When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the

turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.

NOTE:

• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request the appropriate visual alert only.

When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE125

BlindSpotAlertOff

When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.

NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.

AstronomyZone—SystemTemporarilyUnavailable

When the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will display the message “Blind spot system unavailable-Astronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.

Uconnect™Phone—IFEQUIPPED

Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile

126UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

phone using simple voice commands (e.g., "Call" ... "Mike" ... "Work" or "Dial" ... "248-555-1212"). Your mobile phone's audio is transmitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.

NOTE:The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth® "Hands-Free Profile", Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for supported phones.

For Uconnect ^™ customer support, visit the following websites:

• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
- www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1-877-855-8400

Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.

The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect™ features Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or French languages.

WARNING!

Anyvoicecommandedsystemshouldbeusedonlyinsafedrivingconditionsfollowinglocallawsandphoneuse.Allattentionshouldbekeptontheroadwayahead.Failureretodosomayresultinacollisioncausingseriousinjuryordeath.

Uconnect™PhoneButton

The radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped) will contain the two control buttons (Uconnect™ Phone 📋 button and Voice Command button) that will enable you to

access the system. When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

VoiceCommandButton

Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the "Operation" section.

The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details.

The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect™ Phone such as "CELL" or caller ID on certain radios.

128UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Operation

Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect ^TM Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect ^TM Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect ^TM Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the "Ready" prompt or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying "Setup" and then "Pair a Device", the following compound command can be said: "Pair a Bluetooth®Device".
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For

example, you can use the compound form voice command "Phonebook New Entry", or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands: "Phonebook" and "New Entry". Please remember, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

VoiceCommandTree

Refer to "Voice Tree" in this section.

HelpCommand

If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say "Help" following the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions.

Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head.

CancelCommand

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say "Cancel" and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu.

Pair(Link)Uconnect™PhoneToAMobilePhone

To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual. The Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.

The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone pairing instructions:

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Device Pairing".

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

• When prompted, after the beep, say "Pair a Device" and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven, with one being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile

130UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to "Advanced Phone Connectivity" in this section).

DialBySayingANumber

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Dial".
• The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call.
• For example, you can say "234-567-8901".
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios.

CallBySayingAName

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Call".
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say "John Doe", where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to "Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook", in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios.

AddNamesToYourUconnect™Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect ^TM Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook New Entry".
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say "Robert Smith" or "Robert" instead of "Bob".
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., "Home", "Work", "Mobile", or "Other"). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-book entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOF YOURVEHICLE131

After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.

The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone's phonebook.

PhonebookDownload-AutomaticPhonebook TransferFromMobilePhone

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone's phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™ website for supported phones.

132UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in "Call by Saying a Name" section.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect™ Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.

• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.

• Only the mobile phone's phonebook is downloaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.

• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next phone connection.

EditUconnect™PhonebookEntries

NOTE:

• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.

• Press the button to begin.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Edit Entry".

• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu.

"Phonebook Edit Entry" can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE133

mobile and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit Entry” feature.

DeleteUconnect™PhonebookEntry

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Delete".
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say "List Names" to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries

134UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

from the list, press the button while the Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say "Delete".

• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.

Delete/Erase"All"Uconnect™PhonebookEntries

• Press the button to begin.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Erase All".

• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.

• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.

ListAllNamesInTheUconnect™Phonebook

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook List Names".
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.

- To call one of the names in the list, press the button during the playing of the desired name, and say "Call".

NOTE: The user can also exercise "Edit" or "Delete" operations at this point.

- The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call.

• The selected number will be dialed.

PhoneCallFeatures

The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect ^™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect ^™ Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

AnswerOrRejectAnIncomingCall—NoCall CurrentlyInProgress

When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.

AnswerOrRejectAnIncomingCall—Call CurrentlyInProgress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call

136UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

MakingASecondCallWhileCurrentCallIsIn Progress

To make a second call while you are currently on a call, press the ( ^12 VR button and say "Dial" or "Call" followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to "Toggling Between Calls" in this section. To combine two calls, refer to "Conference Call" in this section.

Place/RetrieveACallFromHold

To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.

TogglingBetweenCalls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the ⬤ button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.

ConferenceCall

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

Three-WayCalling

To initiate three-way calling, press the VR button while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as described under "Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress". After the second call has established, press and hold the button until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

CallTermination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.

Redial

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Redial".
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect™ Phone.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE137

CallContinuation

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect™PhoneFeatures

LanguageSelection

To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is using:

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific and is usable across all languages.

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable:

- Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect ^™ Phone is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:

- Press the button to begin.

- After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Emergency" and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.

NOTE:

- The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE139

Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area.

• If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the √ button and say "Setup", followed by "Emergency".
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly.

WARNING!

TouseyourUconnect™PhoneSysteminanemergency,yourmobilephonemustbe:

• turnedon,
  • pairedtotheUconnect™System,
  • andhavenetworkcoverage.

Towing Assistance

If you need towing assistance:

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Towing Assistance".

NOTE:

• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour "Towing Assistance" coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour Towing Assistance references.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the ⬤ button and say "Setup", followed by "Towing Assistance".

140UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Paging

To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.

VoiceMailCalling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to "Working with Automated Systems".

WorkingWithAutomatedSystems

This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances, that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect™ Phone.

When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the («¿VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed by the word "Send". For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the («¿VR button and say, "3 7 4 6 # Send". Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by "Send", is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.

You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call and then press the («VR» button and say, "Send." The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.

The Uconnect ^™ Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.

NOTE:

• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature.

BargeIn—OverridingPrompts

The "Voice Command" button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking "Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...," you could press the (VR) button and say, "Pair a Phone" to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE141

TurningConfirmationPromptsON/OFF

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™ Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say one of the following:

- "Setup Confirmation Prompts On"

- "Setup Confirmation Prompts Off"

PhoneAndNetworkStatusIndicators

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

142UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

DialingUsingTheMobilePhoneKeypad

You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle's audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command.

NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.

Mute/Un-Mute(MuteOFF)

When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:

• Press the button.
• Following the beep, say "Mute".

In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:

• Press the button.
• Following the beep, say "Mute off".

AdvancedPhoneConnectivity

TransferCallToAndFromMobilePhone

The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call

from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the (VR) button and say "Transfer Call".

ConnectOrDisconnectLinkBetweenThe Uconnect™PhoneAndMobilePhone

Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” with one electronic device at a time.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User's Manual.

ListPairedMobilePhoneNames

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing".

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

• When prompted, say "List Phones".
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To "Select" or "Delete" a paired phone being announced, press the («EVR) button and say "Select" or "Delete". Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to "Select" or "Delete" a paired phone.

SelectAnotherMobilePhone

This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.

• Press the 📋 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Select Phone" and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select.

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

- The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.

DeleteUconnect™PhonePairedMobilePhones

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing".
• At the next prompt, say "Delete" and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete.

ThingsYouShouldKnowAboutYourUconnect™ Phone

Uconnect™PhoneTutorial

To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the button and say "Uconnect™ Tutorial."

VoiceTraining

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™ Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:

From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from radio mode):

• Press and hold the _2^ VR button for five seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the ( _2 VR button and say the "Voice Training, System Training, or Start Voice Training" command.

You can either press the Uconnect ^TM Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect ^TM Phone. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off.

This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

Reset

• press the button.
• After the "Ready" prompt, and the following beep, say "Setup", then "Reset".

This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE145

VoiceCommand

• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 12 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
  • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period.
  • Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,

146UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

• fully closed windows,

• dry weather condition.

• Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.

• When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say "Send".
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.

• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.

• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. "800" must be spoken "eight-zero-zero" not "eight hundred".

• You can say "O" (letter "O") for "0" (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.

FarEndAudioPerformance

• Audio quality is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE147

• fully closed windows,
  • dry weather conditions, and
  • operation from the driver's seat.

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect™ Phone.

• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.

RecentCalls

If your phone supports "Automatic Phonebook Download", Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.

SMS

Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on your phone.

ReadMessages:

If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message. If you wish to hear the new message:

• Press the button.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "SMS Read" or "Read Messages."
• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for you.

After reading a message, you can "Reply" or "Forward" the message using Uconnect™ Phone.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

SendMessages:

You can send messages using Uconnect ^™ Phone. To send a new message:

• Press the button.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "SMS Send" or "Send Message."
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say "List Messages." There are 20 preset messages.

To send a message, press the (12VR) button while the system is listing the message and say "Send."

Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to.

List of Preset Messages:

1. Yes

2. No

3. Where are you?

4. I need more direction.
5. LOL
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I'll be late
14. Are you there yet?

15. Where are we meeting?

16. Can this wait?

17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me

TurnSMSIncomingAnnouncementON/OFF

Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages.

• Press the button.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement," you will then be given a choice to change it.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE149

Bluetooth®CommunicationLink

Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth®ON mode.

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.

150UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

graph TD
    A["Main Menu"] --> B["Recent Calls"]
    A --> C["Call"]
    A --> D["Dial"]
    A --> E["Redial"]
    A --> F["Towing Assistance"]
    A --> G["Emergency"]
    A --> H["English/ Espanol/ Francais"]
    A --> I["Phonebook"]
    A --> J["Setup"]
    A --> K["Uconnect™ Tutorial"]
    A --> L["SMS"]
    L --> M["Read Messages"]
    L --> N["Send Messages"]
    C --> O["Enter Name"]
    D --> P["Enter Number"]
    E --> Q["Last Number on Phone is redialed"]
    H --> R["The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used. The phones paired are available across all languages."]
    I --> S["See Phonebook Flowchart"]
    J --> T["See Setup Flowchart"]
    K --> U["Read Messages"]
    L --> V["Send Messages"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE151

graph TD
    A["Phonebook"] --> B["New Entry"]
    A --> C["Edit"]
    A --> D["List Names"]
    A --> E["Delete"]
    A --> F["Erase All"]
    A --> G["Download"]
    B --> H["Enter Name"]
    H --> I["Enter Location"]
    I --> J["Enter Number"]
    J --> K["New Entry Added"]
    C --> L["Enter Name"]
    L --> M["Enter Location"]
    M --> N["Current Number is played"]
    N --> O["Enter New Number"]
    O --> P["Entry is modified"]
    D --> Q["Entries Listed one at a time."]
    E --> R["Enter Name"]
    R --> S["Enter Location"]
    S --> T["Entry Deleted"]
    F --> U["1st Confirmation"]
    U --> V["2nd Confirmation"]
    V --> W["Phonebook Cleared"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

81c6bf80

152UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Voice Tree - Setup

graph TD
    A["Setup"] --> B["Confirmation Prompts"]
    A --> C["Select Audio Devices"]
    A --> D["SMS. Incoming Message Announcement"]
    A --> E["Voice Training"]
    A --> F["Reset"]
    A --> G["Device Pairing"]
    A --> H["Emergency"]
    A --> I["Towing Assistance"]
    A --> J["Select Phone"]
    A --> K["Language"]
    B --> L["Toggle Confirmation Prompts on/off"]
    F --> M["Pair"]
    M --> N["Say 4 digit pin code."]
    N --> O["Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing."]
    G --> P["List Phones"]
    P --> Q["System Lists Phones"]
    G --> R["Delete"]
    R --> S["Select phone to be deleted"]
    S --> T["Phone Deleted"]
    R --> U["All"]
    U --> V["System confirms"]
    R --> W["List Phones"]
    W --> X["System Lists Phones"]
    J --> Y["New phone will temporarily override phone priorities."]
    K --> Z["Select a language: English, Español or Francais"]
    R --> AA["All Phones Deleted"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE153

Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all

Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home

154UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial

Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return	or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UconnectTM Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes

GeneralInformation

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

VOICECOMMAND—IFEQUIPPED

VoiceCommandSystemOperation

This Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE155

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.

WARNING!

Anyvoicecommandedsystemshouldbeusedonlyinsafedrivingconditionsfollowinglocallaws.All attentionshouldbekeptontheroadwayahead.Failuretodosomayresultinacollisioncausingseriousinjuryordeath.

When you press the Voice Command ( _2 VR button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.

NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options, press the Voice Command ( V_2 VR button, listen for the beep, and say your command.

Pressing the Voice Command ( _2^VR button while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options.

NOTE: At any time, you can say the words "Cancel", "Help" or "Main Menu".

These commands are universal and can be used from any menu. All other commands can be used depending upon the active application.

When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume.

The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is set to low.

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.

To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Command ( V_R button and say "Help" or "Main Menu".

Commands

The Voice Command system understands two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active.

ChangingtheVolume

1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command (VR) button.

2. Say a command (e.g., "Help").

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system.

MainMenu

Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command ( ^1 VR button. You may say "Main Menu" to switch to the main menu.

In this mode, you can say the following commands:

• "Radio" (to switch to the radio mode)
• "Disc" (to switch to the disc mode)
• "Memo" (to switch to the memo recorder)
• "Setup" (to switch to system setup)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE157

RadioAM

To switch to the AM band, say "AM" or "Radio AM". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Frequency #" (to change the frequency)
• "Next Station" (to select the next station)
• "Previous Station" (to select the previous station)
• "Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

RadioFM

To switch to the FM band, say "FM" or "Radio FM". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Frequency #" (to change the frequency)
• "Next Station" (to select the next station)
• "Previous Station" (to select the previous station)

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• "Menu Radio" (to switch to the radio menu)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

SatelliteRadio

To switch to satellite radio mode, say "Sat" or "Satellite Radio". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Channel Number" (to change the channel by its spoken number)
• "Next Channel" (to select the next channel)
• "Previous Channel" (to select the previous channel)
• "List Channel" (to hear a list of available channels)
• "Select Name" (to say the name of a channel)
• "Menu Radio" (to switch to the radio menu)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

Disc

To switch to the disc mode, say "Disc". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Track" (#) (to change the track)
• "Next Track" (to play the next track)
• "Previous Track" (to play the previous track)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

Memo

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say "Memo". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

- "New Memo" (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may press the Voice Command ( ^12 VR) button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:

- "Save" (to save the memo)

- "Continue" (to continue recording)

- "Delete" (to delete the recording)

- "Play Memos" (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may press the Voice Command («EVR» button to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:

• "Repeat" (to repeat a memo)
• "Next" (to play the next memo)
• "Previous" (to play the previous memo)
• "Delete" (to delete a memo)
• "Delete All" (to delete all memos)

Setup

To switch to system setup, you may say on of the following:

- "Change to setup"

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE159

• "Switch to system setup"
• "Change to setup"
• "Main menu setup" or
• "Switch to setup"

In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Language English"
• "Language French"
• "Language Spanish"
• "Tutorial"
• "Voice Training"

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command (VR) button first and wait for the beep before speaking the "Barge In" commands.

160UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

VoiceTraining

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ Voice "Voice Training" feature may be used.

1. Press the Voice Command (VR) button, say "System Setup" and once you are in that menu then say "Voice Training." This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the "Voice Training" session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.Inacollision,peopleridingintheseareas aremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

PowerSeats—IfEquipped

Some models may be equipped with eight-way power seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The switches control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.

DriverPowerSeatSwitch
1 — Seat Switch 2 — Seatback Switch

AdjustingTheSeatForwardOrRearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE161

AdjustingTheSeatUpUpDown

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

TiltingTheSeatUpUpDown

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

RecliningTheSeatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

162UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Serious injuryordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjusted seatbelt.
• Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyour chest.Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseat belt,whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleunderapowerseator impedeitsabilitytomoveasitmaycausedamageto theseatcontrols.Seattravelmaybecomelimitedif movementisstoppedbyanobstructionintheseat's path.

PowerLumbar—IfEquipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to a switch (no text or symbols visible)

PowerLumbarSwitch

HeatedSeats—IfEquipped

On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE163

WARNING!

• Personswhoareunabletofeelpaintotheskin becauseofadvancedage,chronicillness,diabetes, spinalcordinjury,medication,alcoholuse,exhaustionorotherphysicalconditionmustexercise carewhenusingtheseatheater.Itmaycauseburns evenatlowtemperatures,especiallyifusedfor longperiodsoftime.
• Donotplaceanythingontheseatthatinsulates againstheat,suchasablanketorcushion.This maycausetheseatheatertooverheat.Sittingina seatthathasbeenoverheatedcouldcauseserious burnsduetotheincreasedsurfacetemperatureof theseat.

VehiclesEquippedWithRemoteStart

On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver's heated seat can be programmed to come on

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

during a remote start. Refer to "Remote Starting System — If Equipped" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

FrontHeatedSeats

There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently. The controls for each heater are located on the switch bank below the climate controls.

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.

Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.

RearHeatedSeats

On some models, the second row seats are equipped with heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the second row passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding side door handle trim panels.

Close-up of a car door handle with two buttons and a white arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

SecondRowHeatedSeatSwitch

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE165

Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HIGH to LOW, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.

166UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

ManualFront/SecondRowSeatAdjuster

Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.

Close-up of a car seat with visible side brackets and a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols)

ManualSeatAdjuster

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Serious injuryordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjusted seatbelt.

ManualRecliningSeats—IfEquipped

For models equipped with manual reclining seats, the recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.

Interior view of a car seat with a double-headed arrow indicating a specific side arm (no text or symbols present)

ManualReclineLever

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE167

To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.

WARNING!

Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest. Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseatbelt, whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

HeadRestraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

Theheadrestraintsforalloccupantsmustbeproperlyadjustedpriortooperatingthevehicleoroccupyingaseat.Headrestraintsshouldneverbeadjustedwhilethevehicleisinmotion.Drivinga vehiclewiththeheadrestraintsimproperlyadjusted orremovedcouldcauseseriousinjuryordeathinthe eventofacollision.

ActiveHeadRestraints—FrontSeats

Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE169

3D model of a car headrest with a black arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols on the object itself)

3D rendered image of a car seatbelt with a handle and neck (no text or symbols)

PushButtonActiveHeadRestraint(NormalPosition)

For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.

022607494

170UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

3D rendered mechanical component with a left-pointing arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

030907533

ActiveHeadRestraint(Tilted)

NOTE:

- The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

- In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to "Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

- DonotplaceitemsoverthetopoftheActiveHead Restraint,suchascoats,seatcoversorportable DVDplayers.Theseitemsmayinterferewiththe operationoftheActiveHeadRestraintintheevent ofacollisionandcouldresultinseriousinjuryor death.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE171

WARNING!(Continued)

- ActiveHeadRestraintsmaybedeployedifthey arestruckbyanobjectsuchasahand,footorloose cargo.ToavoidaccidentaldeploymentoftheActiveHeadRestraintensurethatallcargoissecured,asloosecargocouldcontacttheActiveHead Restraintduringsuddenstops.Failureretofollow thiswarningcouldcausepersonalinjuryifthe ActiveHeadRestraintisdeployed.

HeadRestraints—SecondRowQuadSeats

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

3D model of a car headrest with a black arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols on the object itself)

PushButton

HeadRestraints—SecondRowBench

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

HeadRestraints—ThirdRow

The head restraint in the center position can be raised and lowered for tether routing. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

Stow'nGo®Seating—IfEquipped

On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go® seating, the second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for convenient storage.

SecondRowStow'nGo®

On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go® seats, the seats will fold and tumble in one motion.

1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Recline the front seatback fully forward.
3. Raise the armrests on the second row seat.

NOTE: Seat will not stow in the storage bin unless the armrests are raised.

1. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the "LOCK" position and then pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.

StorageBinCoverLockRelease

1. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat.

Interior view of a car with two leather seats and an arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols on the main subject)

SeatbackReclinerLever, SeatTumble, AndHead RestraintFoldLever

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE173

The non-adjustable head restraint and seatback will fold automatically during the seat tumble. No additional actuation is necessary.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and seatbelt, with no visible text or symbols.

Non-AdjustableHeadRestraint

174UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Interior view of a car showing the seat and dashboard area with an arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

AutomaticFoldingSeatback

The seat will automatically tumble into position for easy storage.

Interior view of a car showing seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

TumbledSecondRowSeat

1. Push the seat into the storage bin.

Interior view of a car showing internal battery pack and seating arrangement (no text or symbols visible)

SeatInStorageBin

1. Close the storage bin cover.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE175

CAUTION!

The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which haveminimal clear anctothecover.

WARNING!

Inacollision, serious injury could result if these at storage bin covers are not properly latched.

• Donotdrivethevehiclewiththestoragebin coversopen.
• Keepthestoragebincoversclosedandlatched whilethevehicleisinmotion.
• Donotuseastoragebinlatchasatiedown.

176UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

ToUnstowSecondRowSeats

1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position.
4. Return the head restraint to its upright position, close the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the "Unlocked" position.

Stow'nGo®Seat—FoldedAndLatchedPosition

To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched position: return the seatback and head restraint to the upright position. Then pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward.

1. Return the seatback to the upright position.

Interior view of a car seat assembly with an arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

RaisingTheSeatback

1. Return the head restraint to the upright position.

Interior view of a car seat with an arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

RaisingTheHeadRestraint

1. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat to fold head rest and seatback and tumble seat forward.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE177

EasyEntrySecondRow

The second row Stow 'n Go® seats allow easy entry to the third row seat or rear cargo area.

Pull up on the seatback recliner lever on the outboard side of the seat.

Interior view of a car showing a black arrow pointing to the seat of the lower half of the vehicle (no text or symbols on the main subject)

SeatbackReclinerLever, SeatTumble, AndHeadRestraintFoldLever

178UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

The seat will automatically fold into position for easy entry into the third row.

WARNING!

Intheeventofacollisionyoucouldbeinjuredifthe seatisnotfullylatched.

QuadSeats—IfEquipped

Both Quad seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.

Close-up of a car door handle and seat area with an arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

ManualSeatAdjuster

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE179

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Serious injuryordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjusted seatbelt.

ManualRecline

To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched.

Interior view of a car's side panel showing steering wheel and keyway (no text or symbols)

ReclineLever

WARNING!

Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest. Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseatbelt, whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

180UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Fold-Flat

To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat and side arm, with a white arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

Fold-FlatQuadSeat

EasyEntry

The Quad seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into the third row. With the Quad seat in the fold-flat position, lift up on the easy entry lever located near the bottom of the seat and lift the seat forward.

Interior view of a car's seatbelt mechanism with a white arrow pointing to the handle (no text or symbols visible)

EasyEntryLever

For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the seatback and accessing the easy entry lever.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and side panels with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

PullStrapforThirdRowPassengers

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE181

To provide additional space behind the second row seats, the seats can be folded forward.

With the seat in its fold-flat position, pull upward on the easy-access release lever and lift the seat into the desired position.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard compartment with an arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols present)

Fold-FlatReleaseLever

182UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Pull out the retainer strap from the sewn-in pocket located on the base of the seat cushion.

Interior view of a car showing the intake manifold and seat structure (no text or symbols visible)

RetainerStrap

Place the strap around the grab handle located on the B-Pillar. Before securing the strap, adjust the buckle for proper fit.

Close-up of hands adjusting a car seatbelt component, no visible text or symbols

B-PillarGrabHandle

Secure the retainer strap to the inside grab handle located on the B-Pillar. When not in use, store the strap in the sewn-in pocket located on the base of the seat cushion.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a belt buckle and mounting bracket (no text or symbols)

RetainerStrap

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE183

WARNING!

Toreducetheriskofpersonalinjury:

• Retainerstrapmustalwaysbesecurelyattached to grabhandlewhenseatisfoldedforward and vehicleismoving.
• Neveroccupytheseatorthecenterseatbehinda seatthathasbeenfoldedforward.

184UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Removal

The Quad seats can be removed if additional storage is needed. With the seat in the easy entry position, lift the cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor latches.

Interior view of a vehicle showing the dashboard, seatbelt, and driver's seat with a white arrow pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols present)

CrossBeamforSeatRemoval

SecondRowBenchSeat—IfEquipped

While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is removable for added cargo space.

Black leather car seat with side panels and seatbelt, no visible text or symbols

SecondRowBenchSeat

Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies, near the floor. To remove the seat, squeeze each release handle and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked. The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its Easy Out®Rollers.

Technical illustration of a vehicle chassis with two arrows pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols present)

ReleaseHandles

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE185

To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate upward until the lock indicator button returns into the handle.

WARNING!

If not properly latched, the bench seats could become loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstalling these seats, besurethered indicator button on there lease handles return into the handles.

186UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

ThirdRowPowerRecline—IfEquipped

The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward for occupant comfort.

Interior view of a car showing the side panel and dashboard area with an arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols present)

ThirdRowPowerSeatSwitch

ThirdRowPowerFoldingSeat—IfEquipped

A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.

NOTE: Lower the head restraint by pulling on the release strap marked "1" located on the outboard side of the head restraint.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

HeadRestraintReleaseStrap"1"

The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is in PARK.

OneTouchFoldingSeatThirdRow

The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE187

Left and right third row seats can be folded individually or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel:

RearPanelPowerSwitchBank

1 — Open to Normal 2 — Stow
3 — Tailgate/Fold Flat 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats

188UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE:

• Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting to fold/stow the power third row seats.
• To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, press a different seat position selector switch to stop the seat. Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position can be selected.
• The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection for safe operation. When the system detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the motion a short distance to move the seat away from the obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle and press the button again, for the desired position.

ManuallyFoldingThirdRowSeats—IfEquipped

1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head restraint down.

2. Lower the outboard head restraints by pulling on the release strap marked "1" located on the outboard side of the head restraint.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

HeadRestraintReleaseStrap"1"

1. Pull release strap marked "2" located on the rear of the seat to lower the seatback.

Close-up of a car's side panel with labeled parts and an arrow pointing to a specific component (no text or symbols present)

ReleaseStrap"2"

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE189

1. Pull release strap marked "3" to release the anchors.

Close-up of a car's side panel with labeled parts and an arrow pointing to component 3 (no text or symbols beyond labels)

ReleaseStrap"3"

190UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Pull release strap marked "4" and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin.

Close-up of a mechanical component with numbered parts and an arrow indicating a specific feature (no text or symbols present)

ReleaseStrap"4"

Top-down view of a car backseat with four compartments and side lockers (no text or symbols visible)

StowedThirdRowSeat

ToUnfoldThirdRowSeats

1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch.

2. Pull release strap marked "2" to unlock the recliner.

3. Pulling strap "4" releases the seatback to return to its full upright position.

4. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.

WARNING!

Inacollision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always besure these seats are fully latched.

TailgateMode

1. Pull release strap "3", then pull release strap "4" to rotate the entire seat rearward.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE191

1. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death, never operate the vehicle with occupants in the third drow seat while in the tail gatemode.

PlasticGroceryBagRetainerHooks

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods.

192UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

DRIVERMEMORYSEAT—IFEQUIPPED

The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver's door panel can be programmed to recall the driver's seat, driver's outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.

Interior view of a car showing the left side of the dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the left side of the door (no text or symbols visible)

DriverMemorySwitch

Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions.

SettingMemoryPositionsAndLinkingRKE TransmitterToMemory

NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one.

1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.

3. Adjust the driver's seat, recliner, and driver's side-view mirror to the desired positions.

4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions.
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key.
7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the driver's door.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver's door. The next step must be performed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE193

1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select "Remote Linked to Memory" in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter "Yes". Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
3. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory position using the other numbered Memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory.

MemoryPositionRecall

NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.

194UNDERSTANDINGTHE FEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

To recall the memory settings for driver one, press MEMORY button 1 on the driver's door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.

To recall the memory setting for driver two, press MEMORY button 2 on the driver's door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the driver's door during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat, driver's mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.

ToDisableRKETransmitterLinkedToMemory

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key.

2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3.

3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located on the driver's door. A chime will sound signaling that you are in the memory set mode.
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver's door. A chime will sound signaling to you that the driver memory has been set.
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will sound signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been successfully disabled.

To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either Memory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE transmitter.

NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

EasyEntry/ExitSeat(AvailableWithMemorySeat ONLY)

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch.

- When you remove the key from the ignition switch, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE195

seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.

• When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit Position.

196UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

TOOPENANDCLOSETHEHOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument panel, below the steering column.

HoodReleaseLever

1. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safety catch downward while raising the hood at the same time.

Front view of a silver car with a black arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols)

031303832
SafetyLeverLocationHoodPropRod

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE197

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a bolted joint (no text or symbols visible)

198UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

Topreventpossibledamage, donotslamthehood to closeit. Lowerthehood untilitisopen approximately 12in(30cm) and thendropit. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hoodis fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Besurethehoodisfullylatchedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Ifthehoodisnotfullylatched,itcouldopen whenthevehicleisinmotionandblockyourvision. Failuretofollowthiswarningcouldresultinserious injuryordeath.

LIGHTS

HeadlightSwitch

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, interior lights and the fog lights.

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with sun, wind, and gear symbols (no readable text or numbers)

HeadlightSwitchWithHaloControl

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.

AutomaticHeadlights—IfEquipped

This system automatically turns your headlights on or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (OFF) position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the Automatic mode.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

199

HeadlightsOnWithWipers—IfEquipped

When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

HeadlightDelay—IfEquipped

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.

To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.

200UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds or not remain on. To change the timer setting, see your authorized dealer.

The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.

Lights-OnReminder

If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver's door is opened.

DaytimeRunningLights—IfEquipped

The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.

FrontFogLights—IfEquipped

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push in the headlight switch control knob. Pressing the headlight switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights off.

DimmerControls

The dimmer switch is located next to the headlight switch.

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with sun, wind, and climate icons, showing a directional arrow pointing to a switch (no text or symbols on controls)

DimmerControl

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE201

InteriorLightingOn

Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent (extreme top position) to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position.

Interior lights are also turned on when a door or liftgate is opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the extreme top.

The interior lights will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if one of the following occur:

• A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
• Any overhead reading light is left on

202UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this feature to operate.

InteriorLightingOff

Rotate the left dimmer control to the off position (extreme bottom). The interior lights will remain off when the doors or liftgate are open.

ParadeMode(DaytimeBrightnessFeature)

Rotate the left dimmer control to the first detent. This feature brightens the odometer, radio and overhead displays when the parking lights or headlights are on.

HaloLights—IfEquipped

Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in locating specific features while driving at night.

The Halo control switch is located to the right of the dimmer switch.

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with sun, wind, and warning icons (no readable text or symbols)

HaloControl

To activate the Halo lights, rotate the Halo switch control upward or downward to increase or decrease the lighting.

MultifunctionLever

The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

Close-up of a car's steering wheel with NIST and PUSH control buttons (no readable text or symbols beyond function labels)

MultifunctionLever

The multifunction lever controls the:

- Turn Signals

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE203

• Headlight Beams Low/High
• Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)
- Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions

TurnSignals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

TurnSignalWarning

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to alert the driver.

204UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

LaneChangeAssist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

High/LowBeamSwitch

When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel will switch from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam operation.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released.

BatteryProtection

This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK position and the headlight switch in any position other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch.

The battery protection feature will be disabled if the ignition switch is turned to any other position other than LOCK during the eight minute delay.

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired wiper speed.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE205

Close-up of a car's left-hand rule switch (NIST) with control buttons and display, no readable text or symbols beyond function labels

WasherAndWiperControls

NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.

WARNING!

Suddenlossofvisibilitythroughthewindshield couldleadtoacollision.Youmightnotseeother vehiclesorotherobstacles.Toavoidsuddenicingof thewindshieldduringfreezingweather,warmthe windshieldwiththedefrosterbeforeandduring windshieldwasheruse.

IntermittentWiperSystem

Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five detents to select the desired delay interval.

NOTE:

- If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

206UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

- At driving speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 second between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second (fifth detent).

WindshieldWiperOperation

Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed operation.

WindshieldWashers

To use the Washer, push on the end of the lever to the second detent and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.

MistFeature

Press the end of the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) to the first detent and release for a single wiping cycle.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

RearWiperAndWasher

Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray until the ring is released, and then resume the intermittent interval.

NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent wiper speed only.

RainSensingWipers—IfEquipped

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this feature.

The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position when not using the system.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

207

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

208UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions:

• LowTemperatureWipeInhibit—The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the outside temperature is below 32^ F ( 0^ C), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

- RemoteStartModeInhibit— On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.

TILT/TELESCOPINGSTEERINGCOLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE209

Close-up of a car's dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Tilt/TelescopingLever

To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Donotadjustthesteeringcolumnwhiledriving. Adjustingthesteeringcolumnwhiledrivingordrivingwiththesteeringcolumnunlocked,couldcause thedrivertolosecontrolofthevehicle.Besurethe steeringcolumnislockedbeforedrivingyourvehicle.Failuretofollowthiswarningmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.

HEATEDSTEERINGWHEEL—IFEQUIPPED

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.

210UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls.

Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel. The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.

VehiclesEquippedWithRemoteStart

On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start. Refer to "Remote Starting System — If Equipped" in "Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

- Persons who are unable to feel to paint the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burn seven at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.

- Donotplaceanythingonthesteeringwheelthat insulatesagainstheat,suchasablanketorsteering wheelcoversofanytypeandmaterial.Thismay causetheeeringwheelheatertooverheat.

ADJUSTABLEPEDALS—IFEQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away

from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel.

The switch is located on the left side of the steering column.

Close-up of a car head panel showing a black arrow pointing to a keyhole (no text or symbols visible)

AdjustablePedalSwitch

Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle).

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE211

Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver).

• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out ("Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged" or "Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse".

212UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleundertheadjustablepedals orimpedeitsabilitytomove,asitmaycausedamage tothepedalcontrols.Pedaltravelmaybecomelimitedifmovementisstoppedbyanobstructioninthe adjustablepedal'spath.

WARNING!

Donotadjustthepedalswhilethevehicleismoving. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always adjustthepedalswhilethevehicleisparked.

ELECTRONICSPEEDCONTROL—IFEQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +

4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at

the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

ToActivate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

LeavingtheElectronicSpeedControlsystemon whennotinuseisdangerous.Youcouldaccidentally setthesystemorcauseittogofasterthanyouwant. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always leavethesystemOFFwhenyouarenotusingit.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ToSetADesiredSpeed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button.

ToDeactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.

214UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

ToResumeSpeed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

ToVaryTheSpeedSetting

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a1mph (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).

To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established.

Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).

ToAccelerateForPassing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

UsingElectronicSpeedControlOnHills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.

WARNING!

ElectronicSpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethe systemcannotmaintainaconstantspeed.Yourvehiclecouldgotoofastfortheconditions,andyou couldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Donotuse ElectronicSpeedControlinheavytrafficoronroads thatarewinding,icy,snow-coveredorslippery.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE215

PARKSENSE®REARPARKASSIST—IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense®Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense®System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

216UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

ParkSense®Sensors

The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense®WarningDisplay

The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster's EVIC display. It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.

ParkSense®WarningDisplay

032839250

ParkSense®Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status.

ParkAssistSystemON

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE217

Park Assist System Off

032737807

ParkAssistSystemOFF

218UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

SlowTone

032839250

FastTone

032839249

ContinuousTone

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE219

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

032839248

WARNINGALERTS
Rear Distance (in/cm)	Greater than 79 in (200 cm)	79-39 in (200-100 cm)	39-25 in (100-65 cm)	25-12 in (65-30 cm)	Less than 12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime	None Single	1/2 Second Tone	Slow Fast Continuous
Display Message	Park Assist System ON	Warning Object Detected	Warning Object Detected	Warning Object Detected	Warning Object Detected
Arcs None 3	Solid	(Continuous)	3 Slow Flashing	2 Slow Flashing	1 Slow Flashing
Radio Mute No	Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense® will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Enabling/DisablingParkSense®

ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled through the Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will display the "PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. When the

shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the "PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

ServiceTheParkSense®RearParkAssistSystem

When the ParkSense®Rear Park Assist System is malfunctioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS" or the "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" message. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the "CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS" or the "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE221

If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the EVIC after making sure the rear fascia/bumper is free from snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, see your authorized dealer.

If "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" appears in the EVIC, see your authorized dealer.

CleaningTheParkSense®System

Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense®SystemUsagePrecautions

NOTE:

- Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.

222UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster will display "PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF." Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will display "PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working

properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.

• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense® should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense® isonlyaparkingaidanditisunable torecognize everyobstacle, includingsmallobstacles. Parkingcurbsmightbetemporarilydetectedornotdetectedatall. Obstacleslocated aboveorbelowthesensorswillnotbedetected whentheyareincloseproximity.
• The vehicle must bedrivenslowly when using ParkSense® inordertobeabletostopintime when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver look over his/shoulder when using ParkSense®.

WARNING!

• Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupeven whenusingtheParkSense®RearParkAssistSystem.Alwayscheckcarefullybehindyourvehicle, lookbehindyou,andbesuretocheckforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions,and blindspotsbeforebackingup.Youareresponsible forsafetyandmustcontinuetopayattentionto yoursurroundings.Failureretodosocanresultin seriousinjuryordeath.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- BeforeusingtheParkSense®RearParkAssist System,itisstronglyrecommendedthattheball mountandhitchballassemblyisdisconnected fromthevehiclewhenthevehicleisnotusedfor towing.Failureretodosocanresultininjuryor damagetovehiclesorobstaclesbecausethehitch ballwillbemuchclosertotheobstaclethanthe rearfasciawhentehewarningdisplayturnsonthe singleflashingarcandsoundsthecontinuous tone.Also,thesensorscoulddetecttheballmount andhitchballassembly,dependingonitssizeand shape,givingafalseindicationthatanobstacleis behindthevehicle.

PARKVIEW® REARBACKUPCAMERA—IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView®Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView®camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE225

When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones

that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

ZoneDistancetotherearofthevehicle
R e d 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

226UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupevenwhen usingtheParkView®RearBackUpCamera.Always checkcarefullybehindyourvehicle,andbesureto checkforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions,orblindspotsbeforebackingup.Youare responsibleforthesafetyofyoursurroundingsand mustcontinuetopayattentionwhilebackingup. Failuretodosocanresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

- To avoid vehicle damage, Park View® should only be used as a parking aid. The camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Toavoidvehicledamage,thevehiclemustbe drivenslowlywhenusingParkView®tobeableto stopintimewhenanobstacleisseen.Itisrecommendedthatthedriverlookfrequentlyoverhis/hershoulderwhenusingParkView®.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

TurningParkView®OnOrOff—With Navigation/MultimediaRadio

1. Press the "menu" hard-key.
2. Select "system setup" soft-key.

3. Press the "camera setup" soft-key.

4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting "enable rear camera in reverse" soft-key.

5. Press the "save" soft-key.

TurningParkView®OnOrOff—Without Navigation/MultimediaRadio

1. Press the "menu" hard-key.
2. Select "system setup" soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting "enable rear camera in reverse" soft-key.

OVERHEADCONSOLES

FrontOverheadConsole

Two versions of the overhead console are available. The base front overhead console model featured fixed incandescent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass storage and conversation mirror. The premium front overhead console model features a LED focused light that

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE227

illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglass storage, conversation mirror, optional power sliding door switches and an optional power liftgate switch.

NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of above except sunglass storage.

Top-down view of a car dashboard with air vent, control panel, and side panels (no text or symbols visible)

033335293
OverheadConsole

228UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Courtesy/InteriorLighting

At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights (standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring, which is identified with four directional arrows (LED lamps only).

The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console (premium console only). This light is turned on when the headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down.

SunglassStorage(Non-SunroofOnly)

At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.

From the closed position, press the door latch to open the compartment.

Interior view of a car dashboard with air conditioner panel and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

OverDoorLatch

The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.

Interior view of a car showing the front compartment with a digital display and ventilation slots (no text or symbols visible)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE229

Interior view of a car showing the air conditioner unit with control panel and buttons (no text or symbols visible)

FullOpenPositionConversationMirrorPosition

From this position, the door can be fully closed or, by rotating upward about 3/4 of the way and releasing, positioned for conversation mirror use.

NOTE: From the "conversation mirror" position, the door can only be closed.

To return to the full open position, the door must first be closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to release.

230UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

RearCourtesy/ReadingLights—IfEquipped

The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.

The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off. You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring, which is identified with four directional arrows.

Top-down view of a mechanical component with concentric circular patterns and two black arrows pointing to features (no text or symbols)

ReadingLights

RearOverheadConsoles—IfEquipped

The rear overhead storage system is available in two versions: with or without sunroof.

An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode, for added convenience.

OverheadCompartmentFeatures

1—DVD ^1 5—Storage
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD
3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
^1 If equipped, otherwise storage.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE231

RearConsoleHaloLighting

The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting around the perimeter of the console base. This feature provides additional lighting options while traveling and is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to "Lights/Halo Lights — If Equipped" in "Understanding the Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

GARAGEDOOROPENER—IFEQUIPPED

HomeLink®replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink®unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.

232UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

The HomeLink®buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink®channels. The HomeLink®indicator is located above the center button.

Control panel with four vertical buttons and a house icon above (no text or symbols on the buttons)

HomeLink®Buttons/OverheadConsoles

Simple illustration of a rounded object with three black ovals and a small house icon on top (no text or symbols)

81cb44fe

HomeLink®Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

BeforeYouBeginProgrammingHomeLink®

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system.

Erase all channels before you begin programming. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE233

position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.

NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly press and release the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

235

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink®button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink®buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

236UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not releasethebutton.
2. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

ProgrammingANon-RollingCode

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

6. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.

7. To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not releasethebutton.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Non-Rolling Code" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Canadian/GateOperatorProgramming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to "time-out" after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE237

to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release ("cycle"), your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

6. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.

7. To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not releasethebutton.
3. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with

"Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

UsingHomeLink®

To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink®Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE239

TroubleshootingTips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink ^® , here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!

• Yourmotorizeddoororgatewillopenandclose whileyouareprogrammingtheuniversaltransceiver.Donotprogramthetransceiverifpeople, petsorotherobjectsareinthepathofthedooror gate.Onlyusethistransceiverwithagaragedoor openerthathasa"stopandreverse"featureas requiredbyFederalsafetystandards.Thisincludes mostgaragedooropenermodelsmanufactured after1982.Donotuseagaragedooropenerwithout thesesafetyfeatures.Calltoll-free1-800-355-3515 or,ontheInternetatwww.HomeLink.comfor safetyinformationorassistance.
• Vehicleexhaustcontainscarbonmonoxide,adangerousgas.Donotrunyourvehicleinthegarage whileprogrammingthetransceiver.Exhaustgas cancauseseriousinjuryordeath.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

POWERSUNROOF—IFEQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console.

PowerSunroofSwitch

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE241

WARNING!

• Neverleavechildreninavehiclewiththekeyin theignitionswitch.Occupants,particularlyunattendedchildren,canbecomeentrappedbythe powersunroofwhileoperatingthepowersunroof switch.Suchentrapmentmayresultinserious injuryordeath.
• Inacollision, thereisgreaterriskofbeingthrown fromvehiclewithanopensunroof. You could also be seriously injuredorkilled. Always fasten your seatbeltproperly and makesureallpassengersareproperlysecured.
• Donotallowsmallchildrentooperatethesun-roof. Neverallowyourfingers, otherbodyparts, or anyobject, toprojectthroughthesunroofopening. Injurymayresult.

242UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

OpeningSunroof—Express

Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

OpeningTheSunroof—ManualMode

To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.

ClosingSunroof—Express

Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second, and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and then stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

ClosingSunroof—ManualMode

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.

PinchProtectFeature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.

PinchProtectOverride

If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position.

NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed.

VentingSunroof—Express

Press and release the "Vent" button, and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE243

SunshadeOperation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.

WindBuffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

244UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

SunroofMaintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

IgnitionOffOperation

For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

SunroofFullyClosed

Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed.

ELECTRICALPOWEROUTLETS—IFEQUIPPED

Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets are located on the lower instrument panel, below the open storage bin. The driver-side power outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the passenger-side power outlet is connected directly to the battery. The driver-side power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker's Package).

Interior view of a car showing the side panel with two buttons and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols present)

InstrumentPanelOutlets
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR®cigar knob and element must be used.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE245

CAUTION!

• Donotexceedthemaximumpowerof160Watts (13Amps)at12Volts.Ifthe160Watt(13Amp) powerratingisexceededthefuseprotectingthe systemwillneedtobereplaced.
• Poweroutletsaredesignedforaccessoryplugs only.Donotinsertanyotherobjectinthepower outletsasthiswilldamagetheoutletandblowthe fuse.Improperuseofthepoweroutletcancause damagenotcoveredbyyourNewVehicleLimited Warranty.

246UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

One outlet in the removable floor console (if equipped) shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is also connected to the battery. Do not exceed a maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor console outlet.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car and dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the dashboard area (no text or symbols present)

RemovableConsoleOutlet

On vehicles equipped with the Super Console the power outlets are located under the retractable cover. To access the power outlets push down on the cover and slide it toward the instrument panel.

Close-up of a car headset with two buttons and directional arrows indicating movement or control (no text or symbols)

SuperConsoleOutlets

The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both controlled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) for each of these outlets.

The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE247

PowerOutletFuses

1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or with Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or with Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or with Console Center

248UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Onlydevicesdesignedforuseinthistypeof outletshouldbeinsertedintoany12Voltoutlet.
• Donottouchwithwethands.
• Closethelidwhennotinuseandwhiledriving thevehicle.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

- Manyaccessoriesthatcanbepluggedindraw powerfromthevehicle'sbattery,evenwhennotin use(i.e.,cellularphones,etc.).Eventually,if pluggedinlongenough,thevehicle'sbatterywill dischargesufficientlytodegradebatterylife and/orpreventtheenginefromstarting.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only us these intermittently and with greater caution.
• Aftertheuseofhighpowerdrawaccessories,or longperiodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(with accessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbe drivenasufficientlengthoftimetoallowthe alternatortorechargethevehicle'sbattery.
• Poweroutletsaredesignedforaccessoryplugs only.Donothanganytypeofaccessoryoraccessorybracketfromtheplug. Improperuseofthe poweroutletcancausedamage.

(Continued)

POWERINVERTER—IFEQUIPPED

A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts DC current to AC current, and is located on the left rear trim panel immediately behind the second row left passenger seat.

Close-up of a car door with a black arrow pointing to the lock, showing no visible text or symbols.

PowerInverterOutlet

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE249

The power inverter switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls.

To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.

This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as PlayStation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.

250UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

CUPHOLDERS

There are cupholders located throughout the interior. All liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge for easy removal. Refer to "Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

InstrumentPanelCupholders

The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out drawer just above the lower storage bin.

Interior view of a car dashboard with two seats and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

FrontCupholders

Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells. The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the container to engage the cupholder retention features.

SuperConsole—IfEquipped

On models equipped with the Super Console, there are two cupholders located in the center of the console.

Interior view of a car dashboard and seat area showing the central intake tray and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

SuperConsoleCupholders

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE251

For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Console. Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the cupholders.

Interior view of a car showing the rearview seat and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

RearCupholders

252UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

PremiumConsoleCupholders—IfEquipped

On models equipped with premium center consoles, there are four cupholders located on the top of the console.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with two arrows pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

PremiumConsoleCupholders

InteriorBottleHolders

There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommodates up to a 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottle.

WARNING!

If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Because when closing the doors to avoid injury.

Interior view of a car dashboard and seat area with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)

InteriorBottleHolder

Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating. The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes, toys, games or MP3 players, etc.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE253

Smoker'sPackageKit—IfEquipped

With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker's Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the two cupholders in the center front instrument panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage.

The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.

254UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

STORAGE

GloveCompartments

Upper and lower glove compartments are located on the passenger side of the instrument panel.

Interior view of a car dashboard with two arrows pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols visible)

UpperandLowerGloveCompartments

UpperGloveCompartment

To open the upper compartment, press in on the button, located on the left side of the upper door. The door will automatically open.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

UpperCompartment

To close the compartment door, push downward on the door's surface to latch the door closed.

LowerGloveCompartment

To open the lower compartment pull out on the release handle.

Close-up of a car door panel with a black arrow pointing to the left side of the door (no text or symbols visible)

LowerCompartment

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE255

NOTE: The lower compartment is equipped with a lock that is part of the compartment handle.

DoorTrimPanelStorage

FrontDoorStorage

Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for storage.

256UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

DriverSeatbackStorage—IfEquipped

The driver's seatback has a primary storage pocket on all models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.

Driver's Seatback Storage

1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket

UmbrellaHolder

An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into the left front door entry scuff molding.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the seat and dashboard, with a white arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols present)

UmbrellaHolder

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE257

SecondRowSeatStorageBins—IfEquipped

The seat storage bins are located on the floor in front of the second row seats. The area below the covers can be used for storage when the second row seat is in the upright position.

Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the "Lock" position to allow greater access to the storage bin.

Interior view of a car showing a rectangular storage or vent with an arrow pointing to the interior (no text or symbols visible)

StorageBin

CAUTION!

NOTE: The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which haveminimal clear anceto the cover.

258UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Inacollision, serious injury could result if these at storage bins covers are not properly latched.

• DONOTdrivethevehiclewiththestoragebin coversopen.
• Keepthestoragebincoversclosedandlatched whilethevehicleisinmotion.
  • DONOTuseastoragebinlatchasatiedown.

StorageBinSafetyWarning

Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

WARNING!

- Alwaysclosethestoragebincoverswhenyour vehicleisunattended.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotallowchildrentohaveaccesstothesecnd rowseatstoragebins.Onceinthestoragebin, youngchildrenmaynotbeabletoescape.If trappedinthestoragebin, childrencandiefrom suffocationorheatstroke.
• Inacollision, serious injury could result if these at storage bin covers are not properly latched.
• Donotdrivethevehiclewiththestoragebin coversopen.Keepthestoragebincoversclosed andlatchedwhilethevehicleisinmotion.
• Donotoperatethestoragebincoverswhilethe vehicleisinmotion.
• Donotuseastoragebinlatchasatiedown.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE259

CAUTION!

The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which haveminimal clear anctothecover.

SeatStorageBinCoverEmergencyReleaseLever

As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a central hole, no visible text or symbols.

StorageBinCoverEmergencyReleaseLever
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

260UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CoatHooks

Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle.

CargoAreaStorage

The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement "Load To This Line". This line indicates how far rearward cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate closing.

Interior view of a car showing the rearrest door panel and internal components (no text or symbols visible)

RearCargoAreaLoadingLimit
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 foot sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position.

CONSOLEFEATURES

There are three consoles available: Basic, Premium and Super.

WARNING!

Donotoperatethisvehiclewithaconsolecompartmentlidintheopenposition.Cellularphones,music players,andotherhandheldelectronicdevices shouldbestowedwhiledriving.Useofthesedevices whiledrivingcancauseanaccidentduetodistraction,resultingindeathorinjury.

BasicConsole

Basic Console features consist of the following:

- The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to easily pass through the first row to the second.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE261

• Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are dishwasher safe for cleaning.
• The cupholders are removable to access a large storage bin.
• The basic console is removable from the vehicle for additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at the console base.

ToRemoveTheBasicFloorConsole

1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to clear the rear load floor hook.
3. Remove the console.

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ToReinstallTheBasicFloorConsole

1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly higher than the rear).
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/hook.
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole is centered on the winch hole.
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing downward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the cover plug.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.

WARNING!

Inanaccident, serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed. Always besure theremovable floor console is fully latched.

PremiumConsole—IfEquipped

The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin, sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage bin offers multiple configurations.

• Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for cleaning. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large cups or mugs with handles.
• Top tray storage
• Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs or other items

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE263

• Large console center storage will store headphones for the available rear DVD entertainment system or other items
• 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
• Rear occupant accessible
• Multiple adjustments
• Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.

The top and center console sections slide forward and rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.

Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders and a convenient storage tray.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with visible dashboard and side seats (no text or symbols)

ConsolePosition1

264UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large storage area below.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat and side armrest (no text or symbols visible)

ConsolePosition2ConsolePosition3

DualStorageBins

Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides easy access to the storage area below and provides two of the four cupholders for the second row passengers.

Interior view of a car showing two car seats with one seat open, no visible text or symbols

Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard, seat compartments, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

ConsolePosition4

ToRemoveThePremiumFloorConsole

1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the console.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/centimeters.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE265

1. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove console.

To reinstall the console:

1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly higher than the front).
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting on the floor bracket.
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated in the rear floor bracket.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.

266UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Inanaccident,seriousinjurycouldresultifthe removablefloorconsoleisnotproperlyinstalled. Alwaysbesuretheremovablefloorconsoleisfully latched.

SuperConsole—IfEquipped

The Super Console contains multiple storage areas, front lower pass through, top forward bin, top rearward bin and rear pull out drawer.

The super console contains a pass through storage area accessible for both the driver and front passenger.

Close-up of a car's side profile showing the vent and grille area, with a black arrow pointing to a specific opening (no text or symbols visible)

FrontLowerPassThrough

The super console tambour doors are opened by pushing down on the finger tabs and sliding the door. The front tambour door slides forward, the rear tambour door slides rearward.

SuperConsole

1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door
2 — Cupholder Light Ring
3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE267

NOTE: The front cupholder light ring and pass through lighting is controlled by a dimming switch located on the instrument panel, refer to "Lights" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

Located in the back of the super console is a storage drawer and cupholders for the rear passengers.

Interior view of a car showing the rear intake and dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the main components)

RearDrawerStorage

268UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CARGOAREAFEATURES

RechargeableFlashlight

The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right side of the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light bulbs and is powered by a lithium battery that recharges when snapped back into place and the vehicle is either running or the key is in the accessory position.

Press in on the flashlight to release it.

Close-up of a car's front panel with a flashlight icon and an arrow pointing to it, no text or symbols visible.

PressAndRelease

To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, twice for low, and a third time to return to off.

Close-up of a metallic electronic device with a black arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)

Three-PressSwitch

035410217

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE269

REARWINDOWFEATURES

RearWindowDefroster

The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

NOTE:

• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparallelto theheatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoff aftersoakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

REARLOAD-LEVELINGSYSTEM—IFEQUIPPED

The automatic load-leveling system will provide a level riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions.

A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions.

If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE271

ROOFLUGGAGERACK—IFEQUIPPED

The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the crossbars. Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars, to maximum of 150 lbs (68 kg). The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

Diagram of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a section (no text or symbols present)

037634930

CrossbarStowedInSideRail

The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

272UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE:

• Crossbars are error-proofed and cannot be deployed or stowed in the incorrect positions.
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side rails when they are not in use.

DeployingtheCrossbars

To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side.

Pure mechanical component diagram without any text, numbers, or symbols

037634933

LooseningCrossbars

CAUTION!

Usecarewhenremovingandhandlingthecrossbars topreventdamagetothevehicle.

Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw down.

3D mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with directional arrows (no text or symbols)

037634934
StowedPosition

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE273

Illustration of a robotic arm joint with a downward arrow indicating force or movement (no text or symbols present)

037634935
DeployedPosition

Then, position the crossbars across the roof.

274UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE: The crossbars are identical and can be placed in any two of the three deploy positions.

Technical illustration of a vehicle chassis with three mechanical components and mounting brackets (no text or symbols)

DeployPositions-ChooseTwoOfThree

Make sure the directional arrows on the crossbars align with the directional arrows on the side rails. Set the crossbars into the deployed positions.

Technical illustration of a mechanical clamp or connector assembly with two arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

CrossbarToSideRailInstallation

Once the crossbars are set into position, tighten the thumb screws completely.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a clamping mechanism with a black arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols present)

TighteningCrossbar

StowingtheCrossbars

Reverse the procedure to stow the crossbars, again, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars are identical and can be stowed in either rail nest. Once the crossbars are stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE275

NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first, with rail tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops.

RailTieLoops

276UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

• Checkdeployedcrossbarsfrequentlyandre-tightenthumbscrewsasnecessary.
• Toavoiddamagetotheroofrackandvehicle,do notexceedthemaximumroofrackloadcapacity of 150lbs(68kg).Alwaysdistributeheavyloadsas evenlyaspossibleandsecuretheloadappropriately.
• Topreventdamagetotheroofofyourvehicle,DO NOTcarryanyloadsontheroofrackwithoutthe crossbarsdeployed.
• Theloadshouldbesecuredandplacedontopof thecrossbars,notdirectlyontheroof.Ifitis necessarytoplacetheloadontheroof,placea blanketorotherprotectivelayerbetweentheload andtheroofsurface.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Longloadswhichextendoverthewindshield, suchaswoodpanelsorsurfboards,orloadswith largefrontalareashouldbesecuredtoboththe frontandrearofthevehicle.
• Travelatreducedspeedsandturncornerscarefullywhencarryinglargeorheavyloadsontheroofrack.Windforces,duetonaturalcausesornearbytrucktraffic,canaddssuddenupwardlifttaloaload.Thisisespeciallytrueonlargeflatloadsandmayresultindamagetothecargooryourvehicle.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE277

WARNING!

Cargomustbesecurelytiedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Improperlysecuredloadscanflyoffthe vehicle,particularlyathighspeeds,resultinginpersonalinjuryorpropertydamage.FollowtheRoof RackCautionswhencarryingcargoonyourroof rack.

SUNSCREEN—IFEQUIPPED

Sun screens are available for second and third row seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest door, seatbelt, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

SunScreenRetracted

Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the window.

278UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Once the screen is completely to the top of the window, extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks attached to the top of the window.

Interior view of a car showing a backrest seat with two arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

SunScreenExtended

To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the base sill.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■Instrument Panel Features 283

■Instrument Cluster — Base ..... 2 8 4

■Instrument Cluster — Premium ..... 285

■Instrument Cluster Descriptions.... 286

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped .... 300

□Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays 302

□EVIC White Telltale Lights 305

□ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights 306

□ EVIC Red Telltale Lights 306

□Oil Change Required 309

□Fuel Economy 310

□Vehicle Speed 3 11

□Trip Info 3 11

□Tire PSI 312

□Units 312

□Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) 312

UNDERSTANDING YOURINSTRUMENT PANEL

□Messages #.... 3 1 3
□Compass / Temperature Display ..... 3 1 3
□Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup) 3 1 5

■Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If Equipped.... 3 2 2

☐Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped ..... 3 2 2
☐Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped ..... 3 2 2

■Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) ..... 3 2 2

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 3 2 3
☐Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play ..... 3 2 6

□Notes On Playing MP3 Files 328
□Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 3 3 0

■Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio (Sales Code RES+RSC). 3 3 1

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 3 3 1
☐Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play ..... 3 3 7

□Notes On Playing MP3 Files ..... 3 3 9
□List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ..... 3 4 1
□Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ..... 3 4 1
□Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped 342
☐Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped ..... 3 4 6

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281

■ iPod®/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped ..... 346

□Connecting The iPod®Or External USB Device.... 3 4 7

□Using This Feature.... 3 4 8

□Controlling The iPod®Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons 348

□Play Mode 349

□List Or Browse Mode.... 350

□Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)....352

■Uconnect™ Multimedia Video Entertainment System (VES)™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 3 5 3

□Getting Started.... 3 5 3

□Play Video Games.... 3 5 4

□Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . 3 5 7

□Dual Video Screen 359

□Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio 359

□Play A DVD Using The VES™ Player (If Equipped) 3 6 2

□Listen To An Audio Source While A Video Is Playing.... 365

□Third Row Swivel Screen (If Equipped) ..... 3 6 7

□Important Notes For Dual Video Screen System 368

□Remote Control 368

□Remote Control Storage....371

□Locking The Remote Control 371

282UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

□Replacing The Remote Control Batteries . . . . 372

□Headphones Operation.... 372

□Controls 373

□Replacing The Headphone Batteries ..... 3 7 4

□Unwired®Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited Warranty 374

□System Information.... 376

■Steering Wheel Audio Controls — If Equipped.... 3 9 0

□Radio Operation.... 391

□CD Player 391

■CD/DVD Disc Maintenance....392

■Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ..... 3 9 2

■Climate Controls 393

□Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System — If Equipped 393

☐Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped 398

☐Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped 400

□ Summer Operation 411

□ Winter Operation 411

□Vacation/Storage 412

□Window Fogging 412

□ Outside Air Intake 412

□Operating Tips 413

□A/C Air Filter 413

INSTRUMENTPANELFEATURES

040136446

1 — Air Vents 5 — Upper Glove Compartment 9 — Storage Bin 13 — Hood Release
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Lower Glove Compartment 10 — Cup Holders 14 — Dimmer Switch
3 — Shift Lever 7 — Climate Controls 11 — Switch Bank 15 — Headlight Switch
4 — Radio 8 — DVD - If Equipped 12 — Ignition Switch

284UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

INSTRUMENTCLUSTER—BASE

040340441

INSTRUMENTCLUSTER—PREMIUM

040335015

286UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

INSTRUMENTCLUSTERDESCRIPTIONS

1.Tachometer

The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator.

2. FrontFogLightIndicator—IfEquipped

D This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

3. Park/HeadlightONIndicator—IfEquipped

This indicator will illuminate when the park

lights or headlights are turned on.

4. TurnSignalIndicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated.

If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signal off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.

5. HighBeamIndicator

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.

6. OdometerDisplay/ElectronicVehicleInformation Center(EVIC)Display—IfEquipped

OdometerDisplay/TripOdometerDisplay

The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your

odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.

This also displays Trip A and Trip B, DTE, MPG or L/100km, OAT (Outside Air Temperature) information to Base Cluster, use STEP and RESET button (on steering wheel) to access or reset the display. For further information refer to “Compass Mini-Trip Computer”.

Message Display Area

When the appropriate conditions exist, the following odometer messages will display:

door. .... DoorAjar gATE. .... LiftgateAjar

LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure

gASCAP Fuel Cap Fault

noFUSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAngE OIL.... Oil Change Required

LoCOOL....Low Cool ant

NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area located in the instrument cluster.

Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped" for further information.

288UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENT PANEL

LoWtirE

When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.

gASCAP

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "gASCAP" message will display in the odometer display area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the STEP button on the steering wheel to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

noFUSE

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or damaged, a "noFUSE" message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to "Fuses" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle".

CHAngEOIL

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the STEP button on the steering wheel. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the following steps.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.

ElectronicVehicleInformationCenter(EVIC)Display—IfEquipped

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. For further information, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)".

7. Anti-Lock Brake(ABS)Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

8. TirePressureMonitoringTelltaleLight—If Equipped

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the

290UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Donotusetiresealantfromacanor balancebeadsifyourvehicleisequippedwitha TPMS,asdamagetothesensorsmayresult.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

9. MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that monitors engine and automatic transmission con-tems. The light will illuminate when the key is in /RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb not come on when turning the key from OFF to UN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

292UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

CAUTION!

ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause damagetotheenginecontrolsystem.Italsocould affectfueleconomyanddrivability.IftheMILis flashing,severecatalyticconverterdamage and powerlosswillsoonoccur.Immediateserviceis required.

WARNING!

Amalfunctioningcatalyticconverter, as referenced above, can reach high temperature than innormal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in deathor serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

10. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light—If Equipped

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:

- The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light—If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

1. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed.

13.FuelDoorReminder

The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle.

14.FuelGauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

15.AirBagWarningLight

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while arising, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

294UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

16.ShiftLeverIndicator

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.

NOTE:

• You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.
• The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

17. VehicleSecurityLight—IfEquipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

18.BrakeWarningLight

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththeredbrakelightonis dangerous.Partofthebrakesystemmayhavefailed. Itwilltakelongertostopthevehicle.Youcouldhave acollision.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

296UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

19.SeatBeltReminderLight

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver or front passenger's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver's seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

20.TemperatureGauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotenginecoolingsystemcould damageyourvehicle.Ifthetemperaturegaugereads "H"pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehicle withtheairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointer dropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointer remainsonthe"H"andyouhearcontinuouschimes, turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallanaauthorizeddealershipforservice.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297

WARNING!

Ahotenginecoolingsystemisdangerous. Youor otherscouldbebadlyburnedbysteamorboiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decidetolook under the hoody yourself, see "Maintaining Your Vehicle". Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Capparagraph.

21.LowFuelLight

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal (7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

22.ChargingSystemLight

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the

ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on

while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".

23.OilPressureWarningLight

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

298UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

24. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

25.ElectronicThrottleControl(ETC)Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.

26. Transmission Temperature Warning Light

During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil may become too hot.

When the transmission overheat warning light

turns on, you will experience reduced vehicle performance until the automatic transmission cools down. Once the transmission has cooled down and the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally. If the high speed is maintained, the overheating will continue to occur.

If the overheating continues, it may become necessary to stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light turns off.

CAUTION!

ContinuousdrivingwiththeTransmissionTemperatureWarningLightilluminatedwilleventuallycauseseveretransmissiondamageortransmissionfailure.

WARNING!

If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, insome circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engineorexhaust components and cause a fire.

300UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ELECTRONICVEHICLEINFORMATIONCENTER (EVIC)—IFEQUIPPED

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

ElectronicVehicleInformationCenter(EVIC)

This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:

• Radio Information
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire PSI
• Vehicle Info
• Messages
• Units
  • System Setup (Personal Settings)
• Turn Menu Off

The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Close-up of a black square keyboard key with directional and back control buttons (no text or symbols beyond standard icons)

EVICSteeringWheelButtons

040941860

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301

UPButton

Press and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units, System Setup) and sub-menus.

DOWNButton

Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and submenus.

SELECTButton

The SELECT button allows access to information in EVIC submenus, selects some feature settings, and resets some EVIC features. The EVIC prompts the driver when the SELECT

button can be used by displaying the right arrow graphic.

302UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

BACKButton

Press the BACK button to scroll back to a

BACK

previous menu or sub-menu.

ElectronicVehicleInformationCenter(EVIC) Displays

The EVIC display consists of three sections:

1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line and outside temperature are displayed.
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up messages are displayed.
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odometer line.

The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The main display area also displays "pop up" messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories:

- FiveSecondStoredMessages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the "Messages" main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an "i" will be displayed in the EVIC's compass/outside temp line. Examples of this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out" and "Low Tire Pressure".

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

- UnstoredMessages

This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a turn signal is left on) and "Lights On"(if driver leaves the vehicle).

• UnstoredMessagesUntilRUN

These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are "Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar" and "Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start".

- FiveSecondUnstoredMessages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this message type are "Memory System Unavailable - Not in Park" and "Automatic High Beams On".

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the middle, and red telltales on the left.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:

• Key in ignition
- Ignition or Accessory On
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
- Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
- Remote start aborted — Fuel low
- Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
- Remote start active — Key to Run
- Wrong Key

304UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

• Damaged Key
  • Key not programmed
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in motion)
• Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts moving)
• Low Tire Pressure
• Service TPM System (refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System" in "Starting And Operating")
  • Premium TPM Service Graphic Display
• Turn Signal On

• RKE Battery Low

• LOW WASHER FLUID

• Oil Change Required
  • Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
  • Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
  • Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
  • Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
• Park Assist Disabled
  • Service Park Assist System
  • Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not In Park

• Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind Spot System has been turned off.

• Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor blockage, electronic interference, or other "temporary" conditions. When this message is displayed both outside rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic interference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the icon only on the side of interference as long as interference is present.

• Service Blind Spot System — This message is displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is permanently unavailable. The driver will receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warning in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If this message is present see an authorized dealer.

EVICWhiteTelltaleLights

This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell-tales. These telltales include:

• ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)Status

The shift lever status "5,4,3,2,1" are displayed indicating the shift lever position. Telltales "5,4,3,2,1" indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For further information on ERS, refer to "Starting And Operating"

• ElectronicSpeedControlReady

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ready. For further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

306UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

• ElectronicSpeedControlSET

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. For further information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”

EVICAmberTelltaleLights

This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell-tales. These telltales include:

- LowFuelLight

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

- LooseGascapIndicator

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the telltale display area. Tighten

the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button

to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

• WindshieldWasherFluidLowIndicator

This light will turn on to indicate the wind-shield washer fluid is low.

EVICRedTelltaleLights

This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These telltales include:

- DoorAjar

This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

• OilPressureWarningLight

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

- ChargingSystemLight

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the

vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".

• ElectronicThrottleControl(ETC)Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb

check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

308UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.

• EngineTemperatureWarningLight

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for more information.

• TransmissionTemperatureWarningLight

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

CAUTION!

ContinuousdrivingwiththeTransmissionTemperatureWarningLightilluminatedwilleventuallycauseseveretransmissiondamageortransmissionfailure.

WARNING!

If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle, insome circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine exhaust components and cause a fire.

OilChangeRequired

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The OilChangeRequiredmessage will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform the following steps.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

FuelEconomy

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until "Fuel Economy" displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy functions display in the EVIC:

• Average Fuel Economy (AVG)
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)

AverageFuelEconomy

This display shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. The Average Fuel Economy can be reset by following the prompt in the EVIC to use the SELECT button. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read "zero" for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.

AverageFuelEconomyDisplay

DistanceToEmpty(DTE)

This display shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.

MilesPerGallon(MPG)

This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

VehicleSpeed

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until "Vehicle Speed" displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time will toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.

NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the EVIC.

Triplinfo

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until "Trip Info" is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons to highlight one of the following functions if you want to reset it:

TripA

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset.

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TripB

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset.

ElapsedTime

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

ToResetATripFunction

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is selected (highlighted). Press and hold the SELECT button to clear the resettable function being displayed.

TirePSI

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until "Tire PSI:" displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at each corner of the graphic.

Units

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until "Units" displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

VehicleInfo(CustomerInformationFeatures)

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until "Vehicle Info" displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the selections below:

- CoolantTemp

Displays the actual coolant temperature.

- OilTemperature

Displays the actual oil temperature.

- OilPressure

Displays the actual oil pressure.

- EngineHours

Displays the number of hours of engine operation.

Messages#

Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message to step through the remaining stored messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Menu.

Compass/TemperatureDisplay

The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature.

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

AutomaticCompassCalibration

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

NOTE:A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.

ManualCompassCalibration

If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:

1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, then press the SELECT button.

3. Press the DOWN button until "Calibrate Compass" is displayed in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration. The "CAL" indicator will be displayed in the EVIC.

5. Complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the "CAL" indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally.

CompassVariance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the compass must be set using the following steps.

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup (Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, then press the SELECT button.

3. Press the DOWN button until the "Compass Variance" message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT button. The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the RETURN button to exit.

Customer-ProgrammableFeatures (SystemSetup)

Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning message SYSTEMSETUPNOTAVAILABLEVEHICLE NOTINPARKdisplays when you try to select "System Setup" from the main menu.

Press and release the UP or DOWN button until "System Setup" is highlighted in the main menu of the EVIC. Then press the SELECT button to enter the System Setup sub-menu. Press and release the UP or DOWN button to select a feature form the following choices:

Language

When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices. Press the SELECT button to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français). Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.

Nav-TurnByTurn

When this feature is selected, the navigation system utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destination is reached. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

Enable/DisabletheRearParkAssistSystem

The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.

AutoUnlockDoors

When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

RemoteUnlockSequence

When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passenger's doors. When AllDoors1stPressis selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

RKELinkedToMemory

When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror, and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the door mounted switch. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

RemoteStartComfortSys.

When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

HornwithRemoteLock

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

FlashLampswithLock

When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

HeadlampOffDelay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

HeadlampswithWipers

(AvailablewithAutoHeadlightsOnly)

When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to "Lights" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."

IntermittentWiperOptions—IfEquipped

When ON is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.

Key-OffPowerDelay

When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

320UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

IlluminatedApproach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

FlasherswithSlidingDoor

When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate when power or manual sliding doors are in operation, signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or entering the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

EasyEntry/ExitSeat

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

TiltMirrorInReverse

When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in a reverse gear, the driver's side mirror will tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.

To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

BlindSpotAlert

There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert ("Blind Spot Alert Lights", "Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM", "Blind Spot Alert Off"). The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in "Blind Spot Alert Lights" mode, when this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in "Blind Spot Alert Lights/CHM" mode, in this mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When "Blind Spot Alert Off" is selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.

To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.

CalibrateCompass

Refer to "Compass Display" for more information.

CompassVariance

Refer to "Compass Display" for more information.

TurnMenuOff

Press and release SELECT to turn the menu off.

322UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

MEDIACENTER730N/430/430N(RHR/RER/RBZ/RHB)CD/DVD/HDD/NAV—IFEQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit's faceplate.

Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or RHB user's manual for detailed operating instructions.

OperatingInstructions(VoiceCommandSystem)—IfEquipped

Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

OperatingInstructions(Uconnect™Phone)—If Equipped

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

MEDIACENTER130(SALESCODERES)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

042305232

MediaCenter130(RES)

OperatingInstructions—RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

324UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

1. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
2. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

AM/FMButton

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISCButton

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

326UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

OperationInstructions—CDMODEForCDAndMP3AudioPlay

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4-3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels.Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• TheRESMediaCenterisasingleCDplayer.Do notattempttoinsertasecondCDifoneisalready loaded.

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NotesonPlayingMP3Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
- Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
- Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate.

MPEG Specification	SamplingFrequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is OFF).

MEDIACENTER130WITHSATELLITERADIO (SALESCODERES+RSC)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

042340030

MediaCenter130(RES/RSC)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

OperatingInstructions—RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

332UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

VoiceCommandSystem(Radio)—IfEquipped

Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

VoiceCommandButtonUconnect™Phone—If Equipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Voice Command" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.

PhoneButtonUconnect™Phone—IfEquipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
   The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

INFOButton

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

ProgramType16-DigitCharacterDisplay
No program type or undefined	None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College	College
Country	Country
Foreign Language	Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnity
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues	Soft R&B
Sports	Sports
Talk	Talk

ProgramType16-DigitCharacterDisplay
Top 40	Top 40
Weather	Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

- Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the

hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISC/AUXButton

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

OperationInstructions—CDMODEforCDand MP3AudioPlay

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4–3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels.Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• TheRESMediaCenterisasingleCDplayer.Do notattempttoinsertasecondCDifoneisalready loaded.

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

338UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

NotesOnPlayingMP3Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8

• Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator"."and a three-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

340UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification	SamplingFrequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

LISTButton(CDModeforMP3Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFOButton(CDModeforMP3Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

342UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to "elapsed time" display.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF).

Uconnect™Multimedia(SatelliteRadio)—If Equipped

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE:Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.

SystemActivation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

ElectronicSerialNumber/SiriusIdentification Number(ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SIDAccess

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.

SelectingUconnect™Multimedia(Satellite)Mode

Press the SAT button until "SAT" appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

SatelliteAntenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.

344UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ReceptionQuality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect™Multimedia (Satellite)Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.

SCANButton

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

INFOButton

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.

TUNEControl(Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:

- Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.

346UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SETButton-ToSetthePushbuttonMemory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

OperatingInstructions(Uconnect™Phone)—If Equipped

Refer to "Uconnect™ Phone" in the Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further details.

iPod®/USB/MP3CONTROL—IFEQUIPPED

NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio iPod®/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User's Manual. iPod®/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as an option with these radios.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

This feature allows an iPod ^® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compartment.

iPod®control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.

NOTE:

• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User's Manual for iPod® or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod ^ or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the iPod ^ /MP3 control feature to control the connected device.

ConnectingTheiPod®OrExternalUSBDevice

Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external USB device to the vehicle's USB connector port which is located in the glove compartment.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and air vent with a black arrow pointing to the intake area (no text or symbols visible)

USBConnectorPort

348UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position where the iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is not available in the glove compartment, route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable.

Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle's iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below.

NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.

UsingThisFeature

By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to USB port:

• The audio device can be played on the vehicle's sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod®contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific audio device)

ControllingTheiPod®OrExternalUSBDevice UsingRadioButtons

To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device, either press the "AUX" button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say "USB" or "Switch to USB". Once in the iPod®/USB/MP3

control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start playing over the vehicle's audio system.

PlayMode

When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external USB device and display data:

- Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR button and say "Next Track".
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say "Previous Track"

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the << RWbutton. Holding the << RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF>> button.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list, or press the VR button and say "Next or Previous Track".
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps

to the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens have been viewed, the last INFObutton press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.

• Pressing the REPEATbutton will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say "Repeat ON" or "Repeat Off".
• Press the SCANbutton to use iPod®/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when it is playing the track, press the SCANbutton again. During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEKand SEEK>> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.
• RNDbutton (available on sales code RES radio only): Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB

device, or press the VR button and say "Shuffle ON" or "Shuffle Off". If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

ListOrBrowseMode

During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device.

• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNEcontrol knob

fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable.

• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in "wrap-around" mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.

• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external USB device.

• Preset 1 – Playlists

• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.

• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESETbutton again to go back to Play mode.

• LISTbutton: The LISTbutton will display the top level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the TUNEcontrol knob. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system.

• MUSICTYPEbutton: The MUSICTYPEbutton is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device.

CAUTION!

• LeavingtheiPod®orexternalUSBdevice(orany supporteddevice)anywhereinthevehiclein extremeheatorcoldcanaltertheoperationor damagethedevice.Followthedevicemanufacturer'sguidelines.
• PlacingitemsontheiPod®orexternalUSBdevice, orconnectionstotheiPod®orexternalUSBdevice inthevehicle, cancausedamagetothedevice and/ortotheconnectors.

WARNING!

DonotpluginorremovetheiPod®orexternalUSB devicewhiledriving.Failureretofollowthiswarning couldresultinanaccident.

BluetoothStreamingAudio(BTSA)

Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect ^™ phone system.

ControllingBTSAUsingRadioButtons

To get into the BTSA mode, press either "AUX" button on the radio or press the VR button and say "Bluetooth Streaming Audio".

PlayMode

When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle's audio system, but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™ phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected and played.

SelectingDifferentAudioDevice

1. Press PHONE button to begin.

2. After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup", then "Select Audio Devices".

3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.

NextTrack

Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the radio and say "Next Track" to jump to the next track music on your cellular phone.

PreviousTrack

Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on the radio and say "Previous Track" to jump to the previous track music on your cellular phone.

Browse

Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the current song that is playing will display info.

UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIAVIDEO ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM(VES)™—IFEQUIPPED

GettingStarted

- Screen(s)locatedintheoverheadconsole: Unfold the overhead LCD screen(s) by pushing the button on the overhead console behind the screen(s).

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and driver seat (no visible text or symbols)

VideoEntertainmentSystem(VES) ^TM

354UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

• Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC position.
- Turn on the VES™ player (if equipped on Dual Screen System) by pushing the Power button, located on the far left, or by pressing the button on the Remote Control.
- When the Video Screen(s) are open and a DVD is inserted into the VESTM player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
- For Dual Video Screen System, Channel 1 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 1 (second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control and Headphones refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to the Dual Video Screen section for more information.

PlayVideoGames

Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA input jacks (1 set or 2 depending on vehicle) located on the back of the center console or on left side behind the second row seat.

1. Video In - Yellow
2. Left Audio In - White
3. Right Audio In - Red
4. AUX 2 Inputs (If Equipped)
5. Power Outlet
6. Power Inverter

When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES ^TM jacks:

NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as PlayStation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter section in your vehicle's Owner's Manual for more information.

Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1.

UsingTheRemoteControl

1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 1 or 2 (depending which AUX input the gaming console is plugged into), by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER on the Remote Control.

SelectVESAUX1ModeOnTheVESScreen

356UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

UsingTheTouch-ScreenRadioControls

1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.

RearVESSoft-key

1. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch either AUX 1 or AUX 2 in the VES column (depending which AUX input is used). To exit press the back arrow soft-key at the top of the screen.

SelectChannel/Screen1And AUX1InTheVESColumn

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

ListenToAnAudioSourceOnChannel2WhileA VideosPlayingOnChannel1

Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2.

UsingTheRemoteControl

1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is playing then only a small banner will appear on the bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE button on the remote until the desired audio source appears on the screen.

SelectFMModeOnTheVESScreen

358UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

UsingTheTouch-ScreenRadioControls

1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.

RearVESSoft-key

1. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at the top left of the left screen.

SelectChannel/Screen2And HDDInTheMEDIAColumn

DualVideoScreen

NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES) ^TM .

• The Remote Control
  • The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)

PlayADVDUsingTheTouch-ScreenRadio

1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts playing the first track.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

1. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1.
2. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1.
4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2.

360UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

UsingTheRemoteControl

1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight DISC by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.

• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen.
• The VES ^TM will retain the last setting when turned off.

UsingTheTouch-ScreenRadioControls

1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.

RearVESSoft-keySelectChannel/Screen1AndDISC

1. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key based on the channel you want to change and then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the screen.

InTheMEDIAColumn

NOTE:

- To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.

362UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off the remote control screen functions.

PlayADVDUsingTheVES™Player(IfEquipped)

1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The VES ^™ player automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc is recognized and starts playing the DVD.
   NOTE: The VES™ player has basic DVD control function such as Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and Stop
2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 1.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for third row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

UsingTheRemoteControl

1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, highlight VES DISC by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER on the Remote Control.

SelectVESDISCModeOnTheVESScreen

NOTE:

• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown on the right side of the screen.
• The VES ^TM will retain the last setting when turned off.

364UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

UsingTheTouch-ScreenRadioControls

1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.

RearVESSoft-key

1. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in the VES column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at the top left of the screen.

SelectChannel/Screen1AndDISCInTheVESColumn NOTE:

- To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

- Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake must be engaged.

ListenToAnAudioSourceWhileAVideosPlaying

Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch are on the same channel. If watching a video on Screen 1 (second row), then Channel 2 could be used for audio. If watching a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Channel 1 could be used for audio.

UsingTheRemoteControl

1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and either the Mode Select Screen will display or a small banner will appear at the bottom of the screen.

2. To listen to an audio source on Channel 1 or 2, either press Up/Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the desired audio source or press the MODE button repeatedly until the desired audio source appears on the screen.

SelectFMModeOnTheVESscreen

366UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

UsingTheTouchScreenRadioControls

1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls. If a channel list is displayed, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.

RearVESSoft-key

1. To listen to an audio source on Channel 1 while a video is playing on Channel/Screen 2, touch the 1 soft-key and choose an audio source. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a video is playing on Channel/Screen 1, touch the 2 soft-key and choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at the top left of the screen.

SelectChannel/Screen2AndHDD InTheMEDIAColumn

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

ThirdRowSwivelScreen(IfEquipped)

• The third row screen or Screen 2 has the ability to lower and swivel to face forward.
• While the swivel screen is facing forward, the second row screen or Screen 1 must be fully open in order for the swivel screen (Screen 2) to work.

368UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ImportantNotesForDualVideoScreenSystem

• VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio and video simultaneously.
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1 and the right side equates to Channel 2.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video source will display on the second row screen or Screen 1 and can be heard on Channel 1.
• Selecting a video source on Channel 2, the video source will display on the third row screen or Screen 2 and can be heard on Channel 2
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even when the screen(s) are closed.

RemoteControl

ControlsAndIndicators

1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear audio while the screen is closed, press the Power button to turn the headphone transmitter on.

2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is pressed, the currently affected channel or channel button is illuminated momentarily.

3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off. The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which channel is being controlled by the remote control. When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).

5. ▶▶– In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.

6. ▼/ Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to the start of the current or previous audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.

7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/RANDOM for a CD).

8. ▶ / ∥ (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.

9. ■(Stop) – Stops disc play

10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode, pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the radio. When listening to compressed audio on a data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG Down selects the previous directory. When listening to a

370UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

disc in a radio with a multiple-disc changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previous disc.

1. MUTE - Press to mute the headphone audio output for the selected channel.
2. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press play (▶) to resume normal play.
3. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
4. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual for details on changing modes.
5. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP button to access the display settings (see the display settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VESTM mode is selected

and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual.)

1. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc's contents.
2. ◀◀- In radio modes, press to seek to the previous tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
3. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a menu.
4. ▲/ NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the next audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371

The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back into position.

TheRemoteControlStorage

LockingTheRemoteControl

All remote control functionality can be disabled as a parental control feature.

- To disable the Remote Control from making any changes, follow the radio's instructions (select menu, rear VES, lock). If the vehicle is not equipped with a

372UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

DVD player, follow the radio's instructions to turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s) indicate when Video Lock is active.

- Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control operation of the VES ^TM .

ReplacingTheRemoteControlBatteries

The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:

- Locate the battery compartment on the back of the remote, then slide the battery cover downward.

- Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown.

- Replace the battery compartment cover.

HeadphonesOperation

The headphones receive two separate channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.

Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to do so for themselves.

If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control, verify that the screen is turned on and in the down position and that the channel is not muted and the headphone channel selector switch is on the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.

1. Volume Control
2. Power Button
3. Channel Selection Switch
4. Power Indicator

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

Controls

The headphone power indicator and controls are located on the right ear cup.

NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off approximately three minutes after the rear video system is turned off.

ChangingtheAudioModeforHeadphones

1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector switch is in the same position as the headphone selector switch..

NOTE:

- When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
• Press the MODE button on the remote control.
• If the video screen is displaying a video source (such as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen.
• When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen, use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and press the ENTER button to select the new mode.
• To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the BACK button on the remote control.

ReplacingTheHeadphoneBatteries

Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:

• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of the headphones, and then slide the battery cover downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.

Unwired®StereoHeadphoneLifetimeLimited Warranty

WhoDoesThisWarrantyCover?This warranty covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or "your") of this particular Unwired Technology LLC ("Unwired") wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is not transferable.

How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.

WhatDoesThisWarrantyCover? Except as specified below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal use is defective in workmanship or materials.

WhatDoesThisWarrantyNotCover?This warranty does not cover any damage or defect that results from misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time through normal use, are specifically not covered (replacement foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR

NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.

What Will Unwired® Do? Unwired®, at its option, will repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired® reserves the right to replace any discontinued Product with a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

If you have any questions or comments regarding your Unwired® wireless headphones, please phone [phone] or email [e-mail].

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

You may register your Unwired® wireless headphones online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at 1-888-293-3332.

SystemInformation

SharedModes

This allows the VES ^TM to output radio sources to the headphones and the radio to output VES ^TM sources to the vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES ^TM channel 1 or 2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES ^TM icon will be visible on the radio's display for that channel, and the shared icon will be visible on the VES ^TM screen. When in shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.

If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared mode with the VES ^TM , only the radio is able to control the radio functions. In this case, VES ^TM can share the radio mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is changed to a mode that is different from the VES ^TM selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority over the VESTM or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT). The VESTM has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM), SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is not in shared mode.

When in shared disc mode both the radio and the VES ^TM have control of the video functions. The VES ^TM has the ability to control the following video modes:

1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track Up/Down).

The VES ^TM can even control radio modes or video modes while the radio is turned off. The VES ^TM can access the radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes on the VES ^TM and activating a radio mode or disc mode.

InformationModeDisplay

InformationModeVideoScreenDisplay

1. Channel 1 Mode
2. Channel 1 Shared Status

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

1. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
2. Channel 2 Mode
3. Channel 2 Shared Status
4. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
5. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action
6. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action
7. Clock
8. Video Lock
9. Not Available / Error
10. Disc Changer Status

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NumericKeypadMenu

NumericKeypadMenu

When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2 shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control's ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This

screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency, satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired digit:

1. Press the remote control's navigation buttons (▲, ▼, ▶, ◀) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control's ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and press the remote control's ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go button and press the remote control's ENTER button.

StationListMenu

When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote control's MENU button displays a list of all available channels. Navigate this list using the remote control's navigation buttons (▲, ▼) to find the desired station,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379

press the remote control's ENTER button to tune to that station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen.

commands which control playback of the disc. Using the options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random play.

DiscMenu

DisplaySettings

DiscMenuForCDsVideoScreenDisplaySettings

When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing the remote control's MENU button displays a list of all

When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote

380UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

control's SETUP button activates the Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearance of the video on the screen. The factory default settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.

To change the settings, press the remote control's navigation buttons (▲, ▼) to select an item, then press the remote control's navigation buttons (▶, ◀) to change the value for the currently selected item. To reset all values back to the original settings, select the Default Settings menu option and press the remote control's ENTER button.

Disc Features control the remote DVD player's (if equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote player.

ListeningToAudioWithTheScreenClosed

To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the screen closed:

• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
• Close the video screen.
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote control's MODE button. This will automatically select the next available audio mode without using the Mode Select menu.
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will automatically turn back on and show the appropriate display menu or media.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381

If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press the remote control's power button to turn audio on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries are installed in the headphones.

DiscFormats

The VES ^™ DVD player is capable of playing the following types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):

• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see notes about DVD Region Codes)
  • DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
  • Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio format files

• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)

DVDRegionCodes

The VESTM DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the player, the disc will not play and will be ejected.

DVDAudioSupport

When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES ^™ DVD player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program material is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you increase the volume level to account for this change in level, remember to lower the volume before changing the disc or to another mode.

382UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

RecordedDiscs

The VES ^™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.

If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may be cases where the VES ^™ DVD player may not be able to play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compatible format and is playable on other players. To help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.

- Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are closed are playable.

• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format. Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not supported.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play the Video_TS portion of the disc.

If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is playable in the VES ^™ DVD player, check with the disc recording software publisher for more information about burning playable discs.

The recommended method for labeling recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the DVD player.

CompressedAudioFiles(MP3andWMA)

The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).

• The DVD player always uses the file extension to determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always end with the extension ".mp3" or ".MP3" and WMA files must always end with the extension ".wma" or ".WMA". To prevent incorrect playback, do not use these extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

• Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play. The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the next available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also supported. For both formats, the recommended sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control's or DVD player's ▲button to advance to the next file, or the ▼button to return to the start of the current or previous file.

384UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

- To change the current directory, use the remote control's PROG Up and Down buttons.

DiscErrors

If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a "Disc Error" message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a "Disc Error" message.

If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD player will attempt to continue playing the disc by

skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the first track.

The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot conditions, such as when the vehicle's interior temperature is above 120^ F. When this occurs, the DVD player will display "VES High Temp" and will shut off the VES ^TM displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player.

Display OtherLanguageSetup

DVDPlayerLanguageMenu

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

All of the Language settings have a special "Other" setting to accommodate languages other than Japanese or English. These languages are selected using a special four-digit code.

To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these additional instructions:

• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, highlight the Language item you want to edit, and then press the remote control ENTER button.

• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select the "Other" setting, then press the remote control's Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.

• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, select a digit for the current position. After selecting the digit, press the remote control's Right cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.

• When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the remote control's ENTER button. If the language code is not valid, the numbers all change back to "*". If the digits are visible after this step, then the language code is valid.

Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more language codes, please contact the dealer where the vehicle was purchased.

LanguageCode	LanguageCode
Dutch 2311 French	1517
German	1304	Italian	1819
Portuguese	2519	Spanish	1418

RatingandPasswordSetup

The Rating and Password settings work together to control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to them where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences.

When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger must enter the correct password using the password entry method described below.

To play all discs without requiring a password, set the DVD player's rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level 1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc. Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible that discs designed for adult audiences can still play without requiring a password.

The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a password) and the default password is 0000.

DVDPasswordEntry

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions:

• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight "Change Password", and then press the remote control's ENTER button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit, and then press the remote control's Right cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the remote control's ENTER button. If the password is correct, the set password screen is displayed.

388UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

• Using the remote control's Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit and the remote control's Right cursor button to select digits, enter the new password.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the remote control's ENTER button to accept the change.

DVDPlayerLevelMenu

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389

To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and follow these additional instructions:

• Using the remote control's Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight "Change Rating", and then press the remote control's ENTER button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the remote control's Up and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit, and then press the remote control's Right cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the remote control's ENTER button. If the password is correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.

- Using the remote control's Up and Down cursor buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the remote control's ENTER button to accept the change.

ProductAgreement

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Dolby®Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP Lossless", and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right reserved.

390UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

GeneralInformation

This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

STEERINGWHEELAUDIOCONTROLS—IF EQUIPPED

Diagram of a car steering wheel with directional arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

045035190

RemoteSoundSystemControls (BackViewOfSteeringWheel)

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine o'clock positions.

The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or to CD mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.

The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand switch is different, depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand rocker switch operation in each mode.

RadioOperation

Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand switch will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.

CDPlayer

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no function in this mode.

392UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

CD/DVDDISCMAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIOOPERATIONANDMOBILEPHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393

CLIMATECONTROLS

The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the instrument panel, below the radio.

ManualHeatingAndAirConditioningSystem—IfEquipped

The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

With the Three-Zone Temperature Control system, each front seat occupant can independently control the Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.

The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel. When the front control is in any position other than rear, the front control operates all the rear functions.

The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit operation. Rear Panel mode is automatically selected when the front control is in the Panel mode. When the front unit is in Bi-Level mode, airflow will be emitted from both the upper and lower rear outlets. When the front control is in Floor, Defrost, or Mix modes, airflow will be directed out of the rear floor outlets.

ManualTemperatureControl

394UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

1.LeftFrontTemperatureControl

Provides left front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings.

2. RearBlowerControl—IfEquipped

Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the rear system in any mode you select. The rear blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the "O" (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds. To allow the rear overhead control, turn blower knob fully to the left, past The "O" off position.

3.FrontBlowerControl

Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the "O" (Off) position. There are seven blower speeds.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the "O" (Off) position. Blower control should be left in the "ON" position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle.

4. Rear Temperature Control—If Equipped

Provides temperature control for the rear cabin. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings in the rear cabin.

5.RightFrontTemperatureControl

Provides right front seat occupant with independent temperature control. Turn left for cooler or right for warmer temperature settings.

6.MixMode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at windshield. This setting is good for maintaining port, while reducing moisture on the windshield.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

7.FrontDefrostMode

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with mum blower and temperature settings for best shield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor may operate in Mix and Defrost, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

8.ElectronicRearWindowDefrost

Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if bed). An indicator in the button will illuminate the rear window defroster is on. The rear window after automatically turns off after approximately minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, the button a second time.

NOTE:

• You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second time.
• To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

- Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to theheatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoff aftersoakingwithwarmwater.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive window cleanerson the interiorsurface of the window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

9. RecirculationControlButton

Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.

NOTE:

• If the Recirculation button is pressed when the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash 3 times to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
• In Floor and Mix mode the system will turn off Recirculation mode after five minutes of operation. You can select Recirculation mode again if desired.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum defogging, select the outside air position.

• In order to prevent fogging, when the Recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to Panel, the A/C will engage automatically.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

10. AirConditioning(A/C)Button

Press and release to change the current setting.

A/C

The indicator illuminates when ON.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

11.FloormodeButton

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets.

12.Bi-LevelModeButton

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

13.PanelmodeButton

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers.

EconomyMode

If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature.

MaxA/C

For maximum cooling use the A/C and Recirculation mode buttons at the same time.

RearManualClimateControl—IfEquipped

The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets.

The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the center of the vehicle.

RearManualClimateControls

1 - Rear Blower 3 - Rear Mode

2 - Rear Temperature 4 - Rear Climate Control Lock

RearBlowerControl

The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.

Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the REAR position do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed.

The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds. This allows the second row seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION!

InteriorairenterstheRearManualClimateControl systemthroughanintakegrille,locatedintheright sidetrimpanelbehindthethirdrowseats.The heateroutletsarelocatedintherightsidetrimpanel, justbehindtheslidingdoor.Donotblockorplace objectsdirectlyinfrontoftheinletgrilleorheater outlets.Theelectricalsystemcouldoverload,causing damagetotheblowermotor.

RearTemperatureControl

The rear mode selection REAR, allows the settings to be controlled by the rear mode control knob.

To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for cold air, and clockwise for heated air.

400UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

When rear controls are locked by the front system, the lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable.

RearModeControl

HeadlinerMode

Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.

Bi-LevelMode

Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

FloorMode

Air comes from the floor outlets.

Automatic Temperature Control(ATC)—If Equipped

• Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to select individual comfort settings.
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto blower operation will be set automatically.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
• SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones, allowing one comfort setting (driver setting) for the cabin, if desired.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401

The Three-Zone ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside air recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains a comfortable temperature, even under changing conditions.

FrontATCPanel

1. AirConditioning(A/C)Button

Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning (A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.

2.LeftFrontSeatOccupantTemperatureDisplay

This display shows the temperature setting for the left front seat occupant.

3.ModeDisplay

This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).

4.BlowerControlDisplay

This display shows the current Blower speed selection.

5.FrontAutoIndicator

This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode.

6.AutoIndicator

This indicates when the system is in Auto mode.

402UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENT PANEL

7.RightFrontSeatOccupantTemperatureDisplay

This display shows the temperature setting for the right front seat occupant.

8.FrontDefrostButton

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected.

9.PassengerTemperatureControlUp/DownButton

Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the lower button for cooler temperature settings.

10.RearControlButton

Provides toggle operation between front control screen and rear control screen. Push the button to activate the rear climate control screen and allow the front seat occupants control over the rear climate settings.

11.RearLock

Press and release the Rear Lock button on the front ATC panel to lock and unlock the rear climate controls

12. AutoTemperatureControlButton

Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and release to select. Refer to "Automatic Operation" for more information. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.

13. ClimateControlOFFButton

Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF.

14.BlowerControl

There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the lowest blower setting. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403

15.ModeControlButton

Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.

16.RecirculationControlButton

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.

17.SYNCButton

Press and release to control the temperature setting for all three zones from the driver temperature control.

18.DriverTemperatureControlUp/DownButton

Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the top button for warmer temperatures or the lower button for cooler temperature settings.

ControllingTheRearClimateControlsFromThe FrontATCPanel

The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.

Tochangetherearsystemsettings:

1. Press "REAR" button to change control to rear control mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Control functions now operate rear system.
2. To return to Front screen, press "REAR button again, or it will revert to the Front screen after six seconds.

graph TD
    1["①"] --> A["Person with arrow"]
    2["②"] --> B["REAR"]
    3["③"] --> C["CAR Icon"]
    4["④"] --> D["AUTO"]

045641992

FrontATCPanelRearControlDisplay

404UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

1.ModeDisplay

This display shows the current Mode selection.

2.RearTemperatureDisplay

This display shows the temperature setting for the rear seat occupants.

3.BlowerControlDisplay

This display shows the current Blower speed selection.

4.RearAutoIndicator

This indicates when the system is in Rear Auto mode.

AutomaticOperation

1. Press the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel and the words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC display, along with two temperatures for the driver and front passenger. The system will then automatically regulate the amount of airflow.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passenger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units by selecting the "Display Units of Measure in"

customer-programmable feature. Refer to the "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features" in this Section.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the front blower knob setting

ManualOperation

This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode.

NOTE: Each of these features operate independently from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, the temperature doors will continue to operate automatically.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405

045633350
BlowerControl

There are seven fixed blower speeds. Use the outer dial control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise and decreases when you move the control counterclockwise.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions.

406UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENTPANEL

PanelMode

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers.

Bi-LevelMode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

FloorMode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

MixMode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable, while keeping the windshield clear.

DefrostMode

Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass.

AirConditioning(A/C)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A/C system.

NOTE:

• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.

RecirculationControl

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. A LED will illuminate on the Recirculation control button when Recirculation mode is selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.

NOTE: In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected.

408UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

RearAutomaticTemperatureControl(ATC)—If Equipped

The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the headliner outlets.

The rear system temperature control is on the front ATC panel located on the instrument panel.

Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel, illuminates a lock symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the front ATC panel.

Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.

The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, near the center of the vehicle.

RearATCControlFeatures

1 - Blower Speed 3 - Rear Mode
2 - Rear Temperature 4 - Rear Temperature Lock

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409

1. Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the front ATC panel. This turns off the Rear Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO.

Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units by selecting the "Display Units of Measure in" customer-programmable feature. Refer to the "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features" in this Section.

410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RearBlowerControl

The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION!

InteriorairenterstheRearAutomaticTemperature ControlSystemthroughanintakegrille,locatedin therightsidetrimpanelbehindthethirdrowseats. Theheateroutletsarelocatedintherightsidetrim panel,justbehindtheslidingdoor.Donotblockor placeobjectsdirectlyinfrontoftheinletgrilleor heateroutlets.Theelectricalsystemcouldoverload causingdamagetotheblowermotor.

RearTemperatureControl

To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the temperature, and clockwise to increase the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the front ATC panel.

When rear controls are locked by the front system, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.

RearModeControl

AutoMode

The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.

HeadlinerMode

Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.

Bi-LevelMode

Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.

NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

FloorMode

Air comes from the floor outlets.

SummerOperation

The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

WinterOperation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging.

412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vacation/Storage

Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

WindowFogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.

OutsideAirIntake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush and snow.

OperatingTipsA/CAirFilter

WEATHER	CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot weather and vehicle interior is very hot	Set the mode control to [IMAGE], [IMAGE] on, and blower on high. Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air. Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort.
Warm weather	Turn on and set the trol to the[IMAGE]
Cool Sunny	Opera position.
Cool & Humid conditions	Set the mode control to on to keep windows clear.
Cold weather	Set the mode control to the on. If windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control towards the position.

On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Refer to "Air Conditioning" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for filter replacement instructions.

□Automatic Transmission....419

□Normal Starting 419

☐Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20^ F Or -29^ C) ..... 4 2 0

□If The Engine Fails To Start....420

□After Starting 422

■Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ..... 4 2 2

■Automatic Transmission....422

□Key Ignition Park Interlock....424

□Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System .. 424

□Fuel Economy (Econ) Mode ..... 4 2 5

□Six-Speed Automatic Transmission....426

□Gear Ranges 427

■Driving On Slippery Surfaces 434

□Acceleration....434

□Traction 435

□Flowing/Rising Water 435

□Shallow Standing Water....436

■Power Steering....437

□Power Steering Fluid Check....438

■Parking Brake 439

■Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 4 4 1

□Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light....4 4 3

Electronic Brake Control System 4 4 3

□Traction Control System (TCS) 4 4 3

□ Brake Assist System (BAS) 444

□Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 4 4 5

□ Hill Start Assist (HSA) 449

■ Tire Safety Information 452

□Tire Markings 452

□Tire Identification Number (TIN) 455

□Tire Terminology And Definitions 456

□Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 457

■ Tires — General Information 461

□Tire Pressure 461

□Tire Inflation Pressures 462

☐Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation ... 463

□Radial-Ply Tires 464

☐Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel – If Equipped 4 6 4

□Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ..... 4 6 5

□Reformulated Gasoline 482

□Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends 483

□E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ..... 4 8 3

□MMT In Gasoline 484

□ Materials Added To Fuel 484

□Fuel System Cautions 485

□Carbon Monoxide Warnings 486

■Flexible Fuel — If Equipped ..... 4 8 6

□E-85 General Information 486

□Ethanol Fuel (E-85) 4 8 8

□Fuel Requirements 488

418 STARTING AND OPERATING

☐Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ..... 4 8 9

□Starting 489

□Cruising Range 489

□Replacement Parts 490

□Maintenance....490

■Adding Fuel 490

□Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) 490

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message....492

■Vehicle Loading 492

□Vehicle Certification Label ..... 4 9 2

■Trailer Towing.... 4 9 5

□Common Towing Definitions.... 495

□Towing Tips 508

■Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) 509

□Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle.... 509

STARTINGPROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovethekey fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.
• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle. A childcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormovethevehicle.

AutomaticTransmission

The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Press the brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear.

NormalStarting

1. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running.

1. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure (Steps 1–3 above).

NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with at transmission shiftinterlockingsystem. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK.

ExtremeColdWeather(Below-20°For-29°C)

Follow the same instructions in the "Normal Starting" procedure.

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

IfTheEngineFailsToStart

WARNING!

• Neverpourfuelorotherflammableliquidsinto thethrottlebodyairinletopeninginanattemptto startthevehicle. This could result in a flashfire causing serious personal injury.
• Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletoget itstarted.Vehiclesequippedwithanautomatic transmissioncannotbestartedthisway.Unburned fuelcouldenterthecatalyticconverterandonce theenginehasstarted,igniteanddamagethe converterandvehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Ifthevehiclehasadischargedbattery,booster cablesmaybeusedtoobtainastartfromabooster batteryorthebatteryinanothervehicle. Thistype ofstartcanbedangerousifdoneimproperly.Refer to"JumpStarting"in"WhatToDoInEmergencies"forfurtherinformation.

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, DONOTcrankthe engineformorethan15-secondintervalsatonetime. Wait10to15secondsbeforetryingagain.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the key fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is running smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should be repeated.

The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINEBLOCKHEATER—IFEQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver's side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remembertodisconnecttheengineblockheater cordbeforedriving.Damagetothe110-115Volt electricalcordcouldcauseelectrocution.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowingprecautionsarenotobserved:

• MovetheshiftleverintoPARKonlyafterthe vehiclehascometoacompletestop.
• ShiftintooroutofREVERSEonlyafterthe vehiclehascometoacompletestopandtheengine isatidlespeed.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• DonotmovetheshiftleverbetweenPARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVEwhentheengineis aboveidlespeed.
• Beforemovingtheshiftleverintoanygear, make sureyourfootisfirmlypressingthebrakepedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

• ItisdangeroustomovetheshiftleveroutofPARK orNEUTRALiftheenginespeedishigherthan idlespeed.Ifyourfootisnotfirmlypressingthe brakepedal,thevehiclecouldacceleratequickly forwardorinreverse.Youcouldlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhitsomeoneorsomething.Onlyshift intogearwhentheengineisidlingnormallyand whenyourfootisfirmlypressingthebrakepedal.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplythe parkingbrake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK, andremovethekeyfob.Oncethekeyfobis removed,theshiftleverislockedinthePARK position,securingthevehicleagainstunwanted movement.Furthermore,youshouldneverleave unattendedchildreninsideavehicle.

KeyIgnitionParkInterlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK.

This system prevents the key fob from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key fob in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.

Brake/TransmissionShiftInterlockSystem

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

The Fuel Economy (ECON) mode can improve the vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal driving conditions. Press the "econ" switch in the center stack of the instrument panel and a green light will indicate the ECON mode is engaged.

FuelEconomyModeSwitch

When the Fuel Economy (ECON) Mode is engaged, the vehicle control systems will change the following:

• The transmission will upshift sooner and downshift later.
• The transmission will skip select gears during shifts to allow the engine to operate at lower speeds.
• The torque converter clutch will engage at lower engine speeds and remain on longer.
  • The engine idle speed will be lower.
• The overall driving performance will be more conservative.
• Some ECON mode functions may be temporarily inhibited based on temperature and other factors.

The shift lever position display (located in the instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position (Refer to Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Interior view of a car dashboard with a left-handled gear shift knob and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

ShiftLever

Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (described later in this section). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

GearRanges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

PARK

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

- NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstitutefor theparkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparking brakefullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehicle movementandpossibleinjuryordamage.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Yourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothers ifitisnotcompletelyinPARK.Checkbytryingto movetheshiftleverrearward(withthebrake pedalreleased)afteryouhaveplaceditinPARK. MakesurethetransmissionisinPARKbefore leavingthevehicle.
• ItisdangeroustomovetheshiftleveroutofPARK orNEUTRALiftheenginespeedishigherthan idlespeed.Ifyourfootisnotfirmlypressingthe brakepedal,thevehiclecouldacceleratequickly forwardorinreverse.Youcouldlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhitsomeoneorsomething.Onlyshift intogearwhentheengineisidlingnormally and yourfootisfirmlypressingthebrakepedal.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplythe parkingbrake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK, andremovethekeyfob.Oncethekeyfobis removed,theshiftleverislockedinthePARK position,securingthevehicleagainstunwanted movement.Furthermore,youshouldneverleave unattendedchildreninsideavehicle.
• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovethekey fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.
• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle. A childcouldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

CAUTION!

- BeforemovingtheshiftleveroutofPARK,you mustturntheignitionswitchfromtheLOCK/OFF positiontotheON/RUNposition,andalsopress thebrakepedal.Otherwise,damagetotheshift levercouldresult.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- DONOTracetheenginewhenshifting from PARKorNEUTRALintoanothergearrange, as thiscandamagethedrivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.

(Continued)

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafe practicesthatlimityourresponsetochangingtraffic orroadconditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhaveacollision.

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcanresult inseveretransmissiondamage.Referto"RecreationalTowing"in"StartingAndOperating"and "TowingADisabledVehicle"inWhatToDoIn Emergencies"forfurtherinformation.

DRIVE

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (described below) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the "Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the engine OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)Operation

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will never shift above third gear, but will shift down into second and first gear normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top available gear.

To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to the right (+) until "D" is once again displayed in the shift lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheir gripandthevehiclecouldskid,causinganaccident orpersonalinjury.

OdometerScreen Display	1	2	3	4	5	6	D
Actual Gear(s)Allowed	1 1-	2 1-3	1-4 1-	5 1-6	1-6

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the left (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

OverdriveOperation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the following conditions are present:

• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
- the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
- the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
- the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.

DRIVINGONSLIPPERYSURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapidacceleration on slipperysurfaces is dangerous. Unequaltraction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerates slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, looses and, etc.).

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a layer of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

DRIVINGTHROUGHWATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/RisingWater

WARNING!

Donotdriveonoracrossaroadorpathwherewater isflowingand/orrising(asinstormrun-off).Flowingwatercanwearawaytheroadorpath'ssurface andcauseyourvehicletosinkintodeeperwater. Furthermore,flowingand/orrisingwatercancarry yourvehicleawaysswiftly.Failuretofollowthis warningmayresultininjuriesthatareseriousor fataltoyou,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so.

CAUTION!

• Alwayscheckthedepthofthestandingwater beforedrivingthroughit.Neverdrivethrough standingwaterthatisdeeperthanthebottomof thetirerimsmountedonthevehicle.
• Determinetheconditionoftheroadorthepath thatisunderwaterandifthereareanyobstaclesin thewaybeforedrivingthroughthestandingwater.
• Donotexceed5mph(8km/h)whendriving throughstandingwater. This will minimizewave effects.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Drivingthroughstandingwatermaycausedamagetoyourvehicle'sdrivetraincomponents.Alwaysinspectyourvehicle'sfluids(i.e.,engineoil, transmission,axle,etc.)forsignsofcontamination (i.e.,fluidthatismilkyorfoamyinappearance) afterdrivingthroughstandingwater.Donotcontinuetooperatethevehicleifanyfluidappears contaminated,asthismayresultinfurtherdamage.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.
• Gettingwaterinsideyourvehicle'senginecan causeittolockupandstallout,andcauseserious internaldamagetotheengine.Suchdamageisnot coveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

(Continued)

WARNING!

• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'stractioncapabilities.Donotexceed5mph (8km/h)whendrivingthroughstandingwater.
• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'sbrakingcapabilities,whichincreasesstoppingdistances.Therefore,afterdrivingthroughstandingwater,driveslowlyandlightlypressonthebrakepedalseveraltimestodrythebrakes.
• Gettingwaterinsideyourvehicle'senginecan causeittolockupandstallout,andleaveyou stranded.
• Failuretofollowthesewarningsmayresultin injuriesthatareseriousorfataltoyou,your passengers,andothersaroundyou.

POWERSTEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!

Continuedoperationwithreducedpowersteering assistcouldposeasafetyrisktoyourselfandothers. Serviceshouldbeobtainedassoonaspossible.

CAUTION!

Prolongedoperationofthesteeringsystemattheend ofthesteeringwheeltravelwillincreasethesteering fluidtemperatureanditshouldbeavoidedwhen possible.Damagetothepowersteeringpumpmay occur.

PowerSteeringFluidCheck

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourpowersteering systemasthechemicalscandamageyourpower steeringcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

Fluidlevelshouldbecheckedonalevelsurfaceand withtheengineofftopreventinjuryfrommoving partsandtoensureaccuratefluidlevelreading.Do notoverfill.Useonlymanufacturer'srecommended powersteeringfluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

PARKINGBRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position.

The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.

ParkingBrake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovethekey fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.
• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.
• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle, and donotleaveKeylessEnter-N-GointheACCor ON/RUNmode. Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormovethevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Besuretheparkingbrakeisfullydisengaged beforedriving;failuretodosocanleadtobrake failureandacollision.
• Alwaysfullyapplytheparkingbrakewhenleavingyourvehicle,oritmayrollandcausedamage orinjury. Also becertaintoleavethetransmission in PARK. Failuretodosomayallowthevehicle to rollandcausedamage orinjury.

CAUTION!

IftheBrakeSystemWarningLightremainsonwith theparkingbrakereleased,abrakesystemmalfunctionisindicated.Havethebrakesystemservicedby anauthorizeddealerimmediately.

ANTI-LOCKBRAKESYSTEM(ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops.

You may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti-lock:

• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop)
  • A clicking sound of solenoid valves
• Brake pedal pulsations

- A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop

WARNING!

• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronicequipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed, or high output radiotransmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
• PumpingoftheAnti-LockBrakeswilldiminish theireffectivenessandmayleadtoacollision. Pumpingmakethestoppingdistancelonger.Just pressfirmlyonyourbrakepedalwhenyouneed toslowdownorstop.

WARNING!(Continued)

• The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.

(Continued)

Anti-LockBrakeWarningLight

The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors the anti-lock brake system. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.

If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Consult with your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible.

ELECTRONICBRAKECONTROLSYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems complement the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers.

TractionControlSystem(TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping

wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if the ESC is in the “Partial Off” mode.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.

WARNING!

• The TC cannot prevent then natural law so physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded.
• The TCScannotpreventcollisions, including those resulting from excessive speedinturns, or hydroplaning.
• ThecapabilitiesofaTCS-equippedvehiclemust neverbeexploitedinarecklessordangerous manner,whichcouldjeopardizetheuser'ssafety orthesafetyofothers.

BrakeAssistSystem(BAS)

The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application, and then applies optimum pressure to the

brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• The BAS cannot prevent then natural law sof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slipper surfaces, or hydroplaning.

WARNING!(Continued)

- The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

(Continued)

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
- Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

- TheElectronicStabilityControl(ESC) cannot prevent thenaturallawsofphysicsfromactingonthe vehicle,norcanitinincreasethetractionaffordedby prevailingroadconditions.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessivespeedinturns, driving on very slipper surface, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle controleduetoin appropriated driver input for the conditions. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ESCOperatingModes

The "ESC Off" switch is located in the center switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.

This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.

ESCPartialOff

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch.

When in the "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the "limited slip" feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will be illuminated. When in the "Partial Off" mode, ESC will operate without engine torque management. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the "ESC Off" switch. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by pressing the "ESC Off" switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

InpartialESCmode, the engine power reduction feature of ESC is disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should turn off with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.

HSAAActivationCriteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or greater hill.

- Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met. The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.

WARNING!

Theremaybesituationsonminorhills(i.e.,lessthan 8%),withaloadedvehicle,orwhilepullingatrailer,whenthesystemwillnotactivateandslighttrolling mayoccur.Thiscouldcauseacollisionwithanother vehicleorobject.Alwaysrememberthedriveris responsibleforbrakingthevehicle.

Disabling/EnablingHSA

If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:

NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds.

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Release the clutch pedal.

6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.

7. Press the "ESC Off" switch (located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls) four times within 20 seconds. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" should turn on and turn off two times.

8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it's previous setting.

TowingWithHSA

HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brakes switch. If so, when the brake pedal is released, ther may not been enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake priorities for releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSAisnotaparkingbrake.Alwaysapplythe parkingbrakefullywhenleavingyourvehicle. Also,becertaintoleavethetransmissioninPARK.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Failuretofollowthesewarningsmaycausethe vehicletorolldowntheinclineandcouldcollide withanothervehicle,objectorperson,andcause seriousorfatalinjury.Alwaysremembertousethe parkingbrakewhileparkingonahillandthatthe driverisresponsibleforbrakingthevehicle.

HSAOff

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

(Continued)

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure

compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

- High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

TireSizingChart

EXAMPLE:

SizeDesignation:

P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards"....blank....." = Passenger car tire based on European design standardsLT= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT or S = Temporary spare tire31= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65= Aspect ratio in percent (%)— Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5= Section width in inches (in)

R= Construction code— "R"means radial construction— "D"means diagonal or bias construction

15= Rim diameter in inches (in)

EXAMPLE:

ServiceDescription:

95= Load Index— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H= Speed Symbol— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

LoadIdentification:

"....blank..." = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire

ExtraLoad(XL)= Extra load (or reinforced) tire

LightLoad(LL)= Light load tire

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

MaximumLoad— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOTMAL9ABCD0301

DOT= Department of Transportation— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—03 means the 3rd week.

01= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—01 means the year 2001— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

TermDefinition
B-PillarThe vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure	Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
MaximumInflationPressureThe maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
RecommendedColdTireInflation Pressure	Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
TirePlacardA paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacardLocation

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

TirePlacardLocation

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

811b5a9a

TireandLoadingInformationPlacard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

StepsForDeterminingCorrectLoadLimit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 - 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:

• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

811a4d11

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause it re failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Usetires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES—GENERALINFORMATION

TirePressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure.

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperlyinflatedtiresaredangerousandcan causecollisions.
• Under-inflationincreasestireflexingandcanresultinover-heatingandtirefailure.
• Over-inflationreducesatire'sabilitytocushion shock.Objectsontheroadandchuckholescan causedamagethatresultintirefailure.
• Over-inflatedorunder-inflatedtirescanaffect vehiclehandlingandcanfailsuddenly, resulting inlossofvehiclecontrol.
• Unequaltirepressurescancausesteeringproblems.Youcouldlosecontrolofyourvehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Unequaltirepressuresfromonesideofthevehicletotheothercancausethevehicletodrifttotherightorleft.
• Alwaysdrivewitheachtireinflatedtotherecommendedcoldtireinflationpressure.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

RideComfortAndVehicleStability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

TireInflationPressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side "B" Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted, and the tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated, even when they are under-inflated.

CAUTION!

Afterinspectingoradjustingthetire pressure,alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswillprevent moistureanddirtfromenteringthevalvestem, whichcoulddamagethevalvestem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12^ F ( 7^ C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature is 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the outside temperature is 32^ F ( 0^ C), then the cold tire

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.

TirePressuresForHigh-SpeedOperation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original-equipment information, or an authorized tire dealer, for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

High-speeddriving, with your vehicleator above maximum load, is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Donot drive vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial-PlyTires

WARNING!

Combiningradialplytireswithothertypesoftires onyourvehiclewillcauseyourvehicletohandle poorly.Theinstabilitycouldcauseacollision.Alwaysuseradialplytiresinsetsoffour.Never combinethemwithothertypesoftires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

SpareTireMatchingOriginalEquippedTireAnd Wheel-IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching temporary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped

with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not install more than one non-matching temporary use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, donottake your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or limited -usetemporary spare installed. Damageto the vehicle may result.

CompactSpareTire-IfEquipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = T temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time

WARNING!

Compactsparesarefortemporaryemergencyuse only.Withthesespares,donotdrivemorethan 50mph(80km/h).Temporaryusespareshavelimited treadlife.Whenthetreadisworntothetreadwear indicators,thetemporaryusesparetireneedstobe replaced.Besuretofollowthewarnings,which applytoyourspare.Failureretodosocouldresultin sparetirefailureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

FullSizeSpare-IfEquipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited-UseSpare—IfEquipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-usesparesareforemergencyuseonly.Installationofthislimited-usesparetireaffectsvehicle handling.Withthistire,donotdrivemorethanthe speedlistedonthelimit-usesparewheel.Keep inflatedtothecoldtireinflationpressurelistedon yourTireandLoadingInformationPlacardlocated onthedriver'ssidedooropening.Replace(orrepair) theoriginalequipmenttireatthefirstopportunity andreinstallitonyourvehicle.Failureretodosocould resultinlossofvehiclecontrol.

TireSpinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h), or for more than 30 seconds continuously, without stopping.

Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

WARNING!

• Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheels speeds may cause tire damage or failure. Atire could explode and injure someone.
• Donotspinyourvehicle'swheelsfasterthan 30mph(48km/h),orformorethan30seconds continuously,whenyouarestuck;anddonotlet anyonearaspinningwheel,nomatterwhatthe speed.

Tread wear indicators are in the original-equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

Two views of a tire showing tread pattern and edge details (no text or symbols)

055007576

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

LifeOfTire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors, including, but not limited to:

• Driving style
• Tire pressure
  • Distance driven

WARNING!

Thetiresandthesparetireshouldbereplacedafter sixyears,regardlessoftheremainingtread.Failureto followthiswarningcanresultinsuddentirefailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollisionresulting inseriousinjuryordeath.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.

ReplacementTires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Please see "Tread Wear Indicators" and "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Donotuseatire, wheelsizeorratingotherthan thatspecifiedforyourvehicle. Some combinations of unapprovedtiresandwheelsmaychangesuspensiondimensionsandperformancecharacteristics, resultinginchangestosteering, handling, and brakingofyourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandlingandstresstosteeringandsuspensioncomponents. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Neveruseatirewithasmallerloadindexor capacity, than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using atirewithasmallerloadindex could result in treoverloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Failuretoequipyourvehiclewithtireshaving adequatespeedcapabilitycanresultinsuddentire failureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Replacingoriginaltireswithtiresofadifferentsize mayresultinfalsespeedometerandodometerreadings.

TIRECHAINS

Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet SAE type "Class S" specifications. Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain manufacturer.

NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observ the following precautions:

• UsechainsonP225/65R16andP235/60R16tires only.P225/65R17tiresdonotprovideadequate clearance.
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and others suspension components, it is important that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Removethedamaged part of the chain before further use.
• Donotexceed45mph(70km/h).
• Drivecautiously and avoid severeturns and large bumps, especially with loaded vehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Installchainsonthefrontwheelsastightlyas possibleandthenretightenafterdrivingabout 0.5mile(0.8km).
• Donotdriveforprolongedperiodsoftimeondry pavement.
• Observethetirechainmanufacturer's instructions onthemethodofinstallation,operatingspeed, andconditionsforuse.Alwaysusethelower suggestedoperatingspeedofthechainmanufacturer,ifdifferentfromthespeedrecommendedby thevehiclemanufacturer.

Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the M+S designation on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.

graph TD
    A["Vehicle Icon"] --> B["Vehicle 1"]
    A --> C["Vehicle 2"]
    B --> D["Vehicle 3"]
    C --> D
    B <--> C

TireRotation

055707139

TIREPRESSUREMONITORSYSTEM(TPMS)

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the cold inflation tire placard pressure requirements found on the tire placard label located on the driver's-side B-pillar.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to "Tires-GeneralInformation" in "Startingand Operating" for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be turned off. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received.

NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20^ F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light." Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will still be on. In this situation, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold tire placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

• TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressureshave beenestablishedforthetiresizeequippedonyour vehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensor damagemayresultwhenusingreplacement equipmentthatisnotofthesamesize,type,and/or style.Aftermarketwheelscancausesensordamage.Donotuseaftermarketsealantsorbalance beadsifyourvehicleisequippedwithaTPMS,as damagetothesensorsmayresult.
• Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswill preventmoistureanddirtfromenteringthevalve stem,whichcoulddamagetheTPMSsensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light."

- Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

BaseSystem

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
  • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
  • TPMS Telltale Warning Light

TirePressureMonitoringLowTirePressureWarnings

The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a "LOW TIRE PRESSURE" message will display in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold tire placard pressure value (located on the placard label on the driver's-side B-Pillar). The system will automatically update and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received.

NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

VehiclesWithCompactSpare

1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, a "LOW TIRE PRESSURE" message will be displayed and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn on.
3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.

NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) for the TPMS to receive this information.

PremiumSystem-IfEquipped

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.

The Premium TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
• Four TPMS Sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graphics displaying tire pressures
  • TPMS Telltale Warning Light

TPMSLowPressureWarnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle's recommended cold tire pressure value. The system will automatically update, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received.

NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

SERVICETPMSYSTEMMessage

The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds. This text message is then followed by a graphic display, with -- in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will not be present, and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

1. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
2. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.

The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message is then followed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message exists.

VehiclesWithCompactSpare

1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will remain on, the "LOW TIRE PRESSURE" message will be displayed, a chime will sound, and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.

NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses:

United States....M R X C 4 W 4 M A 4

Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline." Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/OxygenateBlends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DONOTusegasolinecontainingMethanolorgasolinecontainingmorethan10%Ethanol.Useofthese blendsmayresultinstartinganddriveabilityproblems,damagecriticalfuelsystemcomponents,cause emissionstoexceedtheapplicablestandard,and/or causethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight"toilluminate.Pumplabelsshouldclearlycommunicateifa fuelcontainsgreaterthan10%Ethanol.

Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty.

E-85UsageInNon-FlexFuelVehicles

Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle's warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode
- OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
- increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following:

• change the engine oil and oil filter
- disconnect and reconnect the battery
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.

MMTInGasoline

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

MaterialsAddedToFuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

FuelSystemCautions

CAUTION!

Followtheseguidelinestomaintainyourvehicle's performance:

• TheuseofleadedgasisprohibitedbyFederallaw. Usingleadedgasolinecanimpairengineperformanceanddamagetheemissionscontrolsystem.
• Anout-of-tuneengineorcertainfuelorignition malfunctionscancausethecatalyticconverterto overheat. If you notice apungentburningodor or somelightsmoke, you'renginemaybeoutoftune ormalfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Theuseoffueladditives, which are now being sold as octaneenhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentration of methanol. Fuelsystem damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

CarbonMonoxideWarnings

WARNING!

Carbonmonoxide(CO)inexhaustgasesisdeadly. Followtheprecautionsbelowtopreventcarbon monoxidepoisoning:

- Donotinhaleexhaustgases. They contain carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engineer running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running form more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Guardagainstcarbonmonoxidewithproper maintenance.Havetheexhaustsysteminspected everytimethevehicleisraised.Haveanyabnormalconditionsrepairedpromptly.Untilrepaired, drivewithallsidewindowsfullyopen.
• Keeptheliftgateclosedwhendrivingyourvehicle topreventcarbonmonoxideandotherpoisonous exhaustgasesfromenteringthevehicle.

FLEXIBLEFUEL—IFEQUIPPED

E-85GeneralInformation

The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol(E-85)orUnleadedGasolineOnly. This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to

the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline-only powered vehicles.

CAUTION!

OnlyvehicleswiththeE-85fuelfillerdoorlabelcan operateonE-85.

81ae46ab
E-85FuelCap

81ae46a9

E-85Badge

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!

Ethanolvaporsareextremelyflammableandcould causeseriouspersonalinjury.Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornearthevehiclewhenremovingthefuelfillertubecap(gascap)orfillingthe tank.DonotuseE-85asacleaningagentandnever useitnearanopenflame.

FuelRequirements

Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.

When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:

• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1/4 full
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when refueling
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up.

NOTE:

- When the ambient temperature is above 90^ F ( 32^ C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed.

- Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR®Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.

SelectionOfEngineOilForFlexibleFuelVehicles (E-85)AndGasolineVehicles

FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0^ F ( -18^ C). In the range of 0^ F ( -18^ C) to 32^ F ( 0^ C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32^ F ( 0^ C).

CruisingRange

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.

CAUTION!

Replacingfuelsystemcomponentswithnon-ethanol compatiblecomponentscandamageyourvehicle.

Maintenance

CAUTION!

Donotuseethanolmixturegreaterthan85%inyour vehicle.Itwillcausedifficultyincoldstartingand mayaffectdriveability.

ADDINGFUEL

FuelFillerCap(GasCap)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

Medical illustration of a mechanical device with an arrow indicating a point of interest (no text or symbols present)

FuelFillerCap

NOTE: The driver's side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door.

CAUTION!

• Damagetothefuelsystemoremissionscontrol systemcouldresultfromusinganimproperfuel tankfillertubecap(gascap).Apoorlyfittingcap couldletimpuritiesintothefuelsystemandmay causethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)"to turnon,duetofuelvaporsescapingfromthe system.

• Toavoidfuelspillageandoverfilling, donot "top off" thefueltankafterfilling.

• Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornear thevehiclewhenthegascapisremovedorthe tankisbeingfilled.

• Neveraddfuelwhentheengineisrunning. This is inviolationofmoststateandfederalfireregulationsandmaycausetheMILtoturnon.
• Afiremayresultifgasolineispumpedintoa portablecontainerthatisinsideofavehicle.You couldbeburned.Alwaysplacegascontainerson thegroundwhilefilling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a "clicking" sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened.

- If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

LooseFuelFillerCapMessage

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "gASCAP" message will display in the odometer or a "CHECK GASCAP" message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized dealer as soon as possible.

VEHICLELOADING

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or B-Pillar.

If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.

VehicleCertificationLabel

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver's door B-Pillar.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Rear

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
- Type of Vehicle
• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle, its important that you donot exceed them maximum front rear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

TireSize

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

RimSize

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

InflationPressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

CurbWeight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Overloading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

DonotloadyourvehicleanyheavierthantheGVWR orthemaximumfrontandrearGAWR.Ifyoudo, partsonyourvehiclecanbreak,oritcanchangethe wayyourvehiclehandles.Thiscouldcauseyouto losecontrol.Also,overloadingcanshortenthelifeof yourvehicle.

TRAILERTOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

CommonTowingDefinitions

The following trailer towing-related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

GrossTrailerWeight(GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

GrossCombinationWeightRating(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

It is important that you donot exceed them maximum frontorrear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

TrailerTongueWeight(TW)

The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

FrontalArea

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

TrailerSwayControl

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-CarryingHitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. This type of hitch is the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.

Weight-DistributingHitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer's axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• Animproperlyadjustedweight-distributinghitch systemmayreducehandling,stability,braking performance,andcouldresultinacollision.
• Weight-distributinghitchsystemsmaynotbe compatiblewithsurgebrakecouplers.Consult withanauthorizedhitchandtrailermanufacturer orareputableauthorizedRecreationalVehicle dealerforadditionalinformation.

Line drawing of a car and a mobile campfire (no text or symbols)

057005169

WithoutWeight-DistributingHitch(Incorrect)

Side-view line drawing of a car and a recreational vehicle (no text or symbols)

Side view illustration of a van connected to a trailer (no text or symbols)

057005171

057005172

WithWeight-DistributingHitch(Correct)ImproperAdjustmentof

Weight-DistributingHitch(Incorrect)

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow, and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

TRAILERHITCHCLASSIFICATIONS
Class	Max.GTW(GrossTrailerWt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty	10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

TrailerTowingWeights(MaximumTrailerWeightRatings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission	GCWR(GrossCombinedWt.Rating)	FrontalArea	Max.GTW (GrossTrailerWt.)	Max.TongueWt.
3.6L/Automatic	8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40	sq ft (3.72 sq m)	Up to 2 persons & Luggage 3,600 lbs (1 633 kg)*	360 lbs (163 kg)
	8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40	sq ft (3.72 sq m)	3 to 5 persons & Luggage 3,350 lbs (1 519 kg)*	335 lbs (152 kg)
	8,750 lbs (3 969 kg) 40	sq ft (3.72 sq m)	6 to 7 persons & Luggage 3,000 lbs (1 360 kg)*	300 lbs (136 kg)
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg). Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:Thetrailetongueweightmustbeconsideredaspartofthecombinedweightofoccupantsand cargo,andshouldneverexceedtheweightreferencedontheTireandLoadingInformationplacard.Referto "TireSafetyInformation"in"StartingandOperating"forfurtherinformation.

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severelyside-to-side, which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.

Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.
- The weight of any other type of cargo/luggage or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard" in "Starting and Operating" for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

TowingRequirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

- Donottowatraileratallduringthefirst500miles (805km)thenewvehicleisdriven.Theengine, axleorotherpartscouldbedamaged.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a traileristowed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and donot make starts at full throttle. This help the engine and other part of the vehicle wear in the heavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.

WARNING!

Impropertowingcanleadtoainjurycollision.Followtheseguidelinestomakeyourtrailertowingas safeaspossible:

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargothatis not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
• Whenhaulingcargoortowingatrailer, donot overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safetychainsmustalwaysbeusedbetweenyour vehicleandtrailer.Alwaysconnectthechainsto theframeorhookretainersofthevehiclehitch. Crossthechainsunderthetrailertongueand allowenoughslackforturningcorners.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Vehicleswithtrailersshouldnotbeparkedona grade. Whenparking, applytheparkingbrakeon thetowvehicle. Putthetowvehicleautomatic transmissioninPARK. Always, blockor"chock" thetrailerwheels.
  • GCWRmustnotbeexceeded.
• Totalweightmustbedistributedbetweenthetow vehicleandthetrailersuchthatthefollowingfour ratingsarenotexceeded:
  1.GVWR
  2.GTW
  3.GAWR
• Trailertongueweighitratingforthat trailer hitch.(Thisrequirementmaylimittheabilityto alwaysachievethe10%to15%rangeoftrailer tongueweightasapercentageoftotaltrailer weight.)

TowingRequirements-Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for proper tire

replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

TowingRequirements–TrailerBrakes

• Do notinterconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

If the trailer weighsmorethan 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to this could lead to accelerated brakeling wear, higher brake pedaleffort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

- Donotconnecttrailerbrakestyourvehicle's hydraulicbrakelines.Itcanoverloadyourbrake systemandcauseittofail.Youmightnohave brakeswhenyouneedthemandcouldhavea collision.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Towinganytrailerwillincreaseyourstopping distance. Whentowingyoushouldallowforadditionalspacebetweenyourvehicleandthevehicleinfrontofyou.Failurertodosocouldresultinan collision.

TowingRequirements–TrailerLightsAndWiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or a seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin connector illustrations.

graph TD
    A["6"] --> B[" "]
    C["5"] --> D[" "]
    E["4"] --> F[" "]
    G["3"] --> H[" "]
    B --> I[" "]
    D --> J[" "]
    F --> K[" "]
    H --> L[" "]
    I --> M["1"]
    J --> N["2"]

057003766

Four-PinConnector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 5
    5 --> 6
    6 --> 7
    7 --> 1

057003765

Seven-PinConnector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.

AutomaticTransmission

The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear range.

NOTE: Selecting a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

ElectronicSpeedControl-IfEquipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

CoolingSystem

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

- CityDriving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed.

- HighwayDriving

Reduce speed.

• AirConditioning Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHINDMOTORHOME, ETC.)

TowingThisVehicleBehindAnotherVehicle Recreationaltowingisnotallowed.

CAUTION!

DONOTflattowthisvehicle.Damagetothedrive-trainwillresult.

NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

■Hazard Warning Flashers....513
■If Your Engine Overheats....513
■Jacking And Tire Changing.... 5 1 4

□Jack Location 515
□Spare Tire Removal.... 5 1 6
□To Access Spare Tire Winch Drive Nut . . . . . 5 1 6
□Spare Tire Tools.... 518
□Spare Tire Removal Instructions ..... 5 2 0

□Preparations For Jacking....522
□Jacking Instructions....523
□Securing The Spare Tire....528
□Road Tire Installation 530

■Jump-Starting Procedure....532

□Preparations For Jump-Start ..... 5 3 3
□Jump-Starting Procedure....534

512WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

■Freeing A Stuck Vehicle.... 5 3 6

■Shift Lever Override.... 5 3 7

■Towing A Disabled Vehicle 539

□Without The Ignition Key 541

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the lower center area of the instrument panel.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

IFYOURENGINEOVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

- If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

- You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotcoolingsystemcoulddamage yourvehicle.Iftemperaturegaugereads"H",pull overandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehiclewiththeair conditionerturnedoffuntilthepointerdropsback intothenormalrange.Ifthepointerremainsonthe "H",turntheengineoffimmediately,andcallfor service.

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhetheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

JACKINGANDTIRECHANGING

WARNING!

• Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.
• Beingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. The vehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. You couldbecrushed. Neverputanypartofyourbody underavehiclethatisonajack. If you needed to get underaraised vehicle, take it to aservice center where it can be raised on alift.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewhilethevehicleis onajack.

(Continued)

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES515

WARNING!(Continued)

- Thejackisdesignedtobeusedasatoolfor changingtiresonly.Thejackshouldnotbeusedto liftthevehicleforservicepurposes.Thevehicle shouldbejackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly. Avoidiceorslipperyareas.

JackLocation

The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area. Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.

Interior view of a car's back panel with a mesh grille and a black arrow pointing to the grille (no text or symbols)

JackAndToolLocation

Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack handle, and tools.

516WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

SpareTireRemoval

The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by means of a cable winch mechanism. The “spare tire drive” nut is located on the floor, under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console or under front super console forward bin liner.

ToAccessSpareTireWinchDriveNut

To access the spare tire winch drive nut and lower the spare tire, you will need to refer to one of the following center console configurations.

SuperConsole

For vehicles equipped with the Super Console, the spare tire winch assembly drive nut is located beneath the console.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES517

SuperConsole

1 — Lower Drawer
2 — Front Drawer
3 — Front Drawer Liner

1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor console.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a downward arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)

LowerDrawer

1. Open the front drawer to expose the storage compartment.

518WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES

1. Remove the liner from the console's storage compartment to access the spare tire winch drive nut.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

DriveNutAccess

Premium/Base/CargoCenterConsole

Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug (if equipped) to access the winch drive nut.

Interior view of a car showing two seats with a black arrow pointing to the side of the seat (no text or symbols on the main objects)

WinchCoverAssemblyPlug(IfEquipped)

SpareTireTools

The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be assembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a Winch T-handle; to raise/lower the compact spare tire/cover assembly.

060540391
AssembledT-handle

A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2

060640532
AssemblingTheSpareTireHook

A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle
B — Extension 1
C — Extension 2

520WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

SpareTireRemovalInstructions

The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the center console area.

Close-up of a car wheel assembly with visible components and no text or symbols

SpareTireAndCover

1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a T-handle and place the square end over the spare tire winch drive nut.

2. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.

CAUTION!

The winchmechanismisdesignedforusewiththe winchT-handleonly.Useofanairwrenchorother powertoolsisnotrecommendedandcandamagethe winch.

1. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly, assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a spare tire hook, and pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES521

Technical illustration of a mechanical component with a central gear and shaft, no visible text or symbols

PullingSpareTire
NOTE: If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle.

1. Stand the tire/cover assembly upright and remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the winch retaining tabs together. Push the retainer through the spare tire to release it from the wheel.

Illustration of a hand holding a mechanical component through a circular pipe (no text or symbols visible)

RemovingWheelSpacer

522WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

PreparationsForJacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic,pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidbeinghitwhenoperatingthejack orchangingthewheel.

1. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Place the shift lever into PARK.

4. Turn OFF the ignition.

1. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

JackingInstructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow the set of receiving warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfrom theedgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraising thevehicle.
  • TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.
• Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheelto beraised.
• Settheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetanautomatic transmissioninPARK;amanualtransmissionin REVERSE.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.
• Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack.
• Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedand forliftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.
• Ifworkingonorneararoadway, beextremely carefulofmotortraffic.
• Toassurethatsparetires,flatorinflated,are securelystowed,sparesmustbestowedwiththe valvestemfacingtheground.

(Continued)
JackWarningLabel

524WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicatedintheJacking Instructionsforthisvehicle.

NOTE: Refer to the "Compact Spare Tire" section of "Tires – General Information" for information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.

1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle body.

Side view of a car with two close-up diagrams showing mechanical components (no text or symbols)

JackLocations

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicated.

Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.

Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body and is located 6 in (150 mm) from door edge.

060540390

NOTE: In some situations the jack may need to be placed on its side in order to be pushed under the vehicle. Return the jack to its correct orientation once it is under the vehicle.

526WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Beingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. The vehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. You could be crushed. Nevergetanypartofyourbody underavehiclethatisonajack. If you need to get underaraised vehicle, take it to aservice center where it can be raised on alift.

1. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location. Donotraisethevehicleuntilyouare surethejackissecurelyengaged.
2. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right, using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmake thevehiclelessstable.Itcouldslipoffthejackand hurtsomeonearit.Raisethevehicleonlyenough toremovethetire.

1. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
2. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

CAUTION!

Besuretomountthesparetirewiththevalvestem facingoutward. Thevehiclecouldbedamagedifthe sparetireismountedincorrectly.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES527

Close-up of hands adjusting a car tire with a black arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

MountingSpareTire

NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare.

1. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.

2. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut tightness is 102 ft lbs (138 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.

3. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottightenthe wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

528WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle.Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetirein theplacesprovided.Havethedeflated(flat)tire repairedorreplacedimmediately.

1. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Donotstowthe deflatedtireinthesparetirelocation.Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
2. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form a "T" and fit the winch T-handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism clicks at least three times.

NOTE: Refer to the "Spare Tire Tools" section for instructions on assembling the T-handle.

1. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools back in the stowage compartment.
2. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.

SecuringTheSpareTire

1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T-handle and fit the winch T-handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the vehicle.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES529

WARNING!

Aloosecompactsparetire/coverassembly,thrown forwardinacollisionorhardstopcouldendanger theoccupantsofthevehicle.Alwaysstowthecompactsparetirewiththecoverassemblyintheplace provided.

CAUTION!

Thewinchmechanismisdesignedforusewiththe winchT-handleonly.Useofanairwrenchorother powertoolsisnotrecommendedandcandamagethe winch.

1. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is down, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover assembly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on the opposite side.

CAUTION!

Thecompactsparetire/coverassemblymustbeused whenthecompactsparetireisstored.Failureretouse thiscovercoulddrasticallyreducethelifeofthe compactsparetire.

1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under the vehicle.

WARNING!

Verifythatbothretainertabsofthewheelspacer havebeenproperlyextendedthroughthecenterof thewheelandsparetire/coverassembly.Failureto properlyengagebothretainertabscouldresultin lossofthesparetireandcoverassembly,whichwill causevehicledamageandmaycauselossofvehicle control.

1. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the drive nut to the right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
2. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned correctly against the underside of the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Thewinchmechanismisdesignedspecifically to stowacompactsparetireonly.Donotattempttouse thewinchtostowthefullsizeflattire,oranyother full-sizetire.Vehicledamagemayresult.

RoadTireInstallation

VehiclesEquippedWithWheelCovers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES531

TireAndWheelCoverOrCenterCap

1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
3 — Wheel Lug Nut

1. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottightenthe wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

1. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
2. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 102 ft/lbs (138 N·m). If in doubt about the

532WHATODOIN EMERGENCIES

correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

1. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

VehiclesWithoutWheelCovers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottightenthe wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

1. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
2. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 102 ft/lbs (138 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
3. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES533

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

CAUTION!

Donotuseaportablebatteryboosterpackorany otherboostersourcewithasystemvoltagegreater than12Voltsordamagetothebattery,startermotor, alternatororelectricalsystemmayoccur.

WARNING!

Donotattemptjump-startingifthebatteryisfrozen. Itcouldruptureorexplodeandcausepersonalinjury.

PreparationsForJump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment.

Close-up of a car engine compartment with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

PositiveBatteryPost

534WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

WARNING!

• Takecaretoavoidtheradiatorcoolingfanwheneverthehoodisraised.Itcanstartanytimetheignitionswitchison.Youcanbeinjuredbymovingfanblades.
• Removeanymetaljewelrysuchaswatchbandsor braceletsthatmightmakeaninadvertentelectrical contact.Youcouldbeseriouslyinjured.

• Batteriescontainsulfuricacidthatcanburnyour skinoreyesandgeneratehydrogengaswhichis flammableandexplosive.Keepopenflamesor sparksawayfromthebattery.

• Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

• Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

• If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Donotallowvehiclestotoucheachotherasthis couldestablishagroundconnectionandpersonal injurycouldresult.

Jump-StartingProcedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damaged by a battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle orthedischarged vehicle.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+)post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle's engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Donotconnectthecabletothenegativepost(-)ofthe dischargedbattery. Theresultingelectricalspark couldcausethebatterytoexplodeandcouldresultin personalinjury.

1. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
2. Disconnect the negative (-)jumper cable from the negative (-)post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

3. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

5. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the discharged vehicle.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessoriesthatcanbepluggedintothevehicle poweroutletsdrawpowerfromthevehicle'sbattery, evenwhennotinuse(i.e.,cellularphones,etc.). Eventually,ifpluggedinlongenough,thevehicle's batterywilldischargesufficientlytodegradebattery lifeand/orpreventtheenginefromstarting.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then move the shift lever back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE. Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, is most effective.

CAUTION!

Racingtheengineorspinningthewheelsmayleadto transmissionoverheatingandfailure.AllowtheenginetoidlewiththeshiftleverinNEUTRALforat leastoneminuteaftereveryfiverocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce theriskoftransmissionfailureduringprolonged effortstofreeastuckvehicle.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) to "Partial Off" mode. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

CAUTION!

• When "rocking" astuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, donotspin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damagemay result.
• Revvingtheengineorspinningthewheelstoofast mayleadtotransmissionoverheatingandfailure. Itcanalsodamagethetires.Donotspinthe wheelsabove30mph(48km/h)whileingear(no transmissionshiftingoccurring).

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheels speeds may caused damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and donot let any on near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

SHIFTLEVEROVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

538WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

1. Remove the shift lever override access cover located near the top right of the shift lever in the instrument panel.

Interior view of a car dashboard with gear shift and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

ShiftLeverOverrideAccessCover

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position without starting the engine.
2. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar small, push and hold the override release lever forward.
4. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
5. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
6. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

TOWINGADISABLEDVEHICLE

TowingConditionWheelsOFFtheGroundALLMODELS
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:		____Transmission in NEUTRAL25 mph (40 km/h)maxspeed15 miles (24 km) maxdistance
Wheel lift	Rear
	Front OK
Flatbed ALLBESTMETHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseslingtypeequipmentwhentowing. Damagetothefasciawilloccur.
• Whensecuringthevehicletoaflatbedtruck,do notattachtofrontorrearsuspensioncomponents. Damagetoyourvehiclemayresultfromimproper towing.
• Donotpushortowthisvehiclewithanother vehicleasdamagetothebumperfasciaandtransmissionmayresult.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position, not the LOCK or ACC positions.

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, or wheel liftequipment with the front wheels raised).

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES541

CAUTION!

Towingfasterthan25mph(40km/h)orfartherthan 15miles(24km)withfrontwheelsonthegroundcan causeseveredamagetothetransmission.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimited Warranty.

WithoutThelgnitionKey

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method. However, if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front wheels on

the ground) is not allowed, as transmission damage will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative, the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the setting method can cause severetransmission damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■Engine Compartment — 3.6L ..... 5 4 5

■Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 5 4 6

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message....546

■Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 547

■Replacement Parts 549

■Dealer Service.... 5 4 9

■Maintenance Procedures....549

□Engine Oil 550

□Engine Oil Filter 552

□Engine Air Cleaner Filter....5 5 3

□Exhaust System 554

□Maintenance-Free Battery 556

□Air Conditioner Maintenance....557

□Body Lubrication 560

□Windshield Wiper Blades 560

□Cooling System 562

□Brakes 567

544MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

□Automatic Transmission.... 569
□Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion.... 571
□Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders .. 577

■Fuses 578
□Totally Integrated Power Module....578
■Vehicle Storage 585
■Replacement Bulbs 585
■Bulb Replacement 586
□Headlamps 586
□Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps 587

□Fog Lamps 587
☐Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker And Backup Lamps 588
□Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 588
□License Lamp 589

■ Fluid Capacities 589
■Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ..... 5 9 0

□Engine 590
□Chassis 591

ENGINECOMPARTMENT—3.6L

1 — Air Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Battery 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

546MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

ONBOARDDIAGNOSTICSYSTEM—OBDII

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

- ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause furtherdamagetotheemissioncontrolsystem.It couldalsoaffectfueleconomyanddriveability. Thevehiclemustbeservicedbeforeanyemissions testscanbeperformed.

- IftheMILisflashingwhiletheengineisrunning, severecatalyticconverterdamageandpowerloss willsoonoccur.Immediateserviceisrequired.

LooseFuelFillerCapMessage

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "gASCAP" message will display in the odometer or a "CHECK GASCAP" message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to

"Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.

Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.

EMISSIONSINSPECTIONANDMAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not in the engine is running, and that the OBD II is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

548MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

1. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is notready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is notready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENTPARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.

DEALERSERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Onlydoserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtheproperequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma servicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.

MAINTENANCEPROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failuretoproperlymaintainyourvehicleorperformrepairsandservicewhennecessarycould resultinmorecostlyrepairs,damagetoother componentsornegativelyimpactvehicleperformance.Immediatelyhavepotentialmalfunctions examinedbyanaauthorizedChryslerGroupLLC dealershiporqualifiedrepaircenter.
• Yourvehiclehasbeenbuiltwithimprovedfluids thatprotecttheperformanceanddurability of yourvehicleandalsoallowextendedmaintenance intervals.Donotusechemicalflushesinthese componentsasthechemicalscandamageyour engine,transmission,powersteeringorairconditioning.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.Ifaflushisneeded becauseofcomponentmalfunction,useonlythe specifiedfluidfortheflushingprocedure.

EngineOil

CheckingOilLevel

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfillingorunderfillingwillcauseoilaeration,or lossofoilpressure.Thiscoulddamageyouengine.

ChangeEngineOil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

NOTE: Undernocircumstances should oil change intervalsexceed 8,000 miles (13000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.

EngineOilSelection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

AmericanPetroleumInstitute(API)EngineOil IdentificationSymbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourengineoilasthe chemicalscandamageyourengine.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.

For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number, should not be used.

SyntheticEngineOils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

MaterialsAddedToEngineOil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

DisposingOfUsedEngineOilAndOilFilters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

EngineOilFilter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

EngineOilFilterSelection

The manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.

EngineAirCleanerFilter

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Theairinductionsystem(aircleaner,hoses,etc.)can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Donotremovetheairinduction system(air cleaner,hoses,etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Makes sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system(aircleaner, hoses,etc.) removed. Failure todos can result in serious personal injury.

EngineAirCleanerFilterSelection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR ^® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

554MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

ExhaustSystem

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbonmonoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/ExhaustGas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
• Ahotexhaustsystemcanstartafireifyoupark overmaterialsthatcanburn.Suchmaterialsmight begrassorleavescomingintocontactwithyour exhaustsystem.Donotparkoroperateyourvehicleinareaswhereyourehaustsystemcan contactanythingthatcanburn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and causes serious damage to the engine.
• Damagethecatalyticconvertercanresultifyour vehicleisnotkeptinproperoperatingcondition. Intheeventofenginemalfunction, particularly involvingenginemisfireorotherapparentlossof performance, haveyourvehicleservicedpromptly. Continuedoperationofyourvehiclewithasevere malfunctioncouldcausetheconvertertooverheat, resultinginpossibledamagetotheconverterand vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

556MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Maintenance-FreeBattery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

• Batteryfluidisacorrosiveacidsolutionandcan burnorevenblindyou.Donotallowbatteryfluid tocontactyoureyes,skin,orclothing.Donotlean overabatterywhenattachingclamps.Ifacid splashesineyesoronskin,flushtheareaimmediatelywithlargeamountsofwater.Referto "Jump-StartingProcedures"in"WhatToDoIn Emergencies"forfurtherinformation.
• Batterygasisflammableandexplosive.Keep flameorsparksawayfromthebattery.Donotuse aboosterbatteryoranyotherboostersourcewith anoutputgreaterthan12Volts.Donotallowcable clampstotoucheachother.
• Batteryposts,terminals,andrelatedaccessories containleadandleadcompounds.Washhands afterhandling.

CAUTION!

• Itisessentialwhenreplacingthecablesonthe batterythatthepositivecableisattachedtothe positivepostandthenegativecableisattachedto thenegativepost.Batterypostsaremarkedpositive(+)andnegative(-)andareidentifiedonthe batterycase.Cableclampsshouldbetightonthe terminalpostsandfreeofcorrosion.
• Ifa"fastcharger"isusedwhilethebatteryisin thevehicle,disconnectbothvehiclebatterycables beforeconnectingthechargertothebattery.Do notusea"fastcharger"toprovidestartingvoltage.

AirConditionerMaintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system performance check. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourairconditioning systemasthechemicalscandamageyourairconditioningcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

• Useonlyrefrigerantsandcompressorlubricants approvedbythemanufacturerforyourairconditioningsystem.Someunapprovedrefrigerantsare flammableandcanexplode,injuringyou.Other unapprovedrefrigerantsorlubricantscancause thesystemtofail,requiringcostlyrepairs.Referto WarrantyInformationBook,locatedontheDVD, forfurtherwarrantyinformation.
• The airconditioningsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury, damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring linestobed disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer, or other authorized service facility, using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer-approved A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants.

A/CAirFilter

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

DonotremovetheA/Cairfilterwhilethebloweris operatingorpersonalinjurymayresult.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.

Mechanical component with two upward arrows indicating force or movement (no text or symbols)

A/CAirFilterReplacement

1. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.
2. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.

CAUTION!

TheA/Cairfilterisidentifiedwithanarrowto indicate airflowdirectionthroughthefilter.Failure toproperlyinstallthefilterwillresultintheneedto replaceitmoreoften.

1. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.

BodyLubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to

hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder.

WindshieldWiperBlades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

AddingWasherFluid

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine compartment and should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out any residual water.

The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.

WARNING!

Commerciallyavailablewindshieldwashersolvents areflammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washers solution.

After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR® All Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.

CoolingSystem

WARNING!

• Whenworkingneartheradiatorcoolingfan, disconnect the fan motor lead to turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch in the ON position.
• Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthe hood,donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhas hadtimetocool.Nevertrytoopenacooling systempressurecapwhentheradiatorishot.

CoolantChecks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

CoolingSystem-Drain,Flush,AndRefill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

SelectionOfCoolant

Use only the manufacturer's recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer "Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan specifiedHybridOrganicAdditiveTechnology (HOAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze),mayresultin enginedamageandmaydecreasecorrosionprotection.Ifanon-HOATenginecoolant(antifreeze)isintroducedintothecoolingsysteminanemergency,itshouldbereplacedwiththespecified enginecoolant(antifreeze)assoonaspossible.
• Donotusewateraloneoralcoholbasedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditionalrustinhibitorsoranti-rustproducts,asthey maynotbecompatiblewiththeradiatorengine coolant(antifreeze)andmayplugtheradiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

564MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

AddingCoolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

- The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34^ ( -37^ ) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent coolant changes.

CoolingSystemPressureCap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

- The warning words "DONOTOPENHOT" on the cooling system pressure cap areas safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Donot loosenor remove the captocoolan over heated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, donot removal the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotuseapressurecapotherthantheone specifiedforyourvehicle.Personalinjuryorenginedamagemayresult.

DisposalOfUsedCoolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

CoolantLevel

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the

566MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

engine cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing the engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

PointsToRemember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine, which contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of the condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brakes

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Ridingthebrakescanleadtobrakefailureand possiblyacollision.Drivingwithyourfootrestingor ridingonthebrakepedalcanresultinabnormally highbraketemperatures,excessiveliningwear,and possiblebrakedamage.Youwouldnothaveyourfull brakingcapacityinanemergency.

568MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

MasterCylinder-BrakeFluidLevelCheck

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services, or immediately if the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system failure.

Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the "FULL" mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system.

Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

- Useonlymanufacturer'srecommendedbrake fluid. Referto "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brakes system and/or impair performance. The property of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder deservoir.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir to secure data all times. Brake fluid a open container absorbsmoisture from the air resulting in lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
  • Overfillingthebrakefluidreservoircanresultin spillingbrakefluidonhotengineparts, causing thebrakefluidtocatchfire.Brakefluidcanalso damagepaintedandvinylsurfaces,careshouldbe takentoavoiditscontactwiththesesurfaces.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotallowpetroleumbasedfluidtocontaminatethebrakefluid.Brakesealcomponentscould bedamaged,causingpartialorcompletebrake failure.Thiscouldresultinacollision.

AutomaticTransmission

The automatic transmission and differential assembly are contained within a single housing.

The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and the fluid.

The six-speed transmission is equipped with a capped dipstick tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered with. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly.

570MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

SelectionOfLubricant

It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer's recommended transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant may be used.

CAUTION!

Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthemanufac-turer'srecommendedfluidmaycausedeterioration intransmissionshiftqualityand/ororqueconverter shudder. Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthe manufacturer'srecommendedfluidwillresultin morefrequentfluidandfilterchanges. Referto "Fluids,Lubricants,andGenuineParts" in "MaintainingYourVehicle" forfurtherinformation.

SpecialAdditives

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourtransmissionas thechemicalscandamageyourtransmissioncomponents.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.

FluidLevelCheck

The six-speed automatic transmission is a sealed unit and has no dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have the transmission fluid checked or serviced.

FluidAndFilterChanges

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed.

AppearanceCareAndProtectionFromCorrosion

ProtectionOfBodyAndPaintFromCorrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

WhatCausesCorrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

572MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
  • Stone and gravel impact
• Insects, tree sap and tar
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities
  • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR®Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseabrasiveorstrongcleaningmaterials suchassteelwoolorscouringpowder,whichwill scratchmetalandpaintedsurfaces.
• Useofpowerwashersexceeding1,200psi (8274kPa)canresultindamageorremovalof paintanddecals.

SpecialCare

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR®Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

WheelAndWheelTrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.

To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust the following MOPAR®wheel cleaners are recommended or select a non-abrasive, non acidic cleaner.

• For chrome wheels, use MOPAR®Chrome Cleaner (Part# 04318013) or equivalent.
• For aluminum wheels, use MOPAR®Wheel Cleaner (Part# 04796239AB) or equivalent.

CAUTION!

Donotusescouringpads,steelwool,abristlebrush, ormetalpolishes.Donotuseovencleaner.These productsmaydamagethewheel'sprotectivefinish. Avoidautomaticcarwashesthatuseacidicsolutions orharshbrushesthatmaydamagethewheel'sprotectivefinish.UseonlytheapprovedMOPAR® WheelCleanersorequivalent.

StainRepelFabricCleaningProcedure-If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR®Multi-Purpose Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

InteriorCare

InstrumentPanelSurfaces

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface.

CleaningInteriorTrim

Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR®Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery

CleaningLeatherUpholstery

MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any

liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Donotusevolatilesolventsforcleaningpurposes. Manyarepotentiallyflammable,andifusedin closedareastheymaycauserespiratoryharm.

CleaningHeadlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

576MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

GlassSurfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR®Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

CleaningPlasticInstrumentClusterLenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.

SeatBeltMaintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE577

Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if the buckles do not work properly.

CleaningTheInstrumentPanelCupholders

Removal

Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting at one edge to ease removal.

Cleaning

The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow the cleaning procedure below.

Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for

approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.

Installation

Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the corresponding openings in the drawer.

578MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

FUSES

TotallyIntegratedPowerModule

The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the applicable "Engine Compartment" illustration in this section. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that identifies each component may be printed or embossed on the inside of the cover.

Interior view of a car showing two battery compartments with wiring and a white arrow pointing to one (no text or symbols)

TotallyIntegratedPowerModule

CAUTION!

• WheninstallingtheTotallyIntegratedPower Modulecover,itisimportanttoensurethecoveris properlypositionedandfullylatched.Failureto dosomayallowwatertogetintotheIntegrated PowerModule,andpossiblyresultinaelectrical systemfailure.
• Whenreplacingablownfuse,itisimportantto useonlyafusehavingthecorrectamperagerating. Theuseofafusewitharatingotherthanindicated mayresultinadangerouselectricalsystemoverload.Ifaproperlyratedfusecontinuestoblow,it indicatesaprobleminthecircuitthatmustbe corrected.

The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the following table.

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
J1 40	Amp Green	— Power Folding Seat
J2 30	Amp Pink	— Power Liftgate Module
J3 30	Amp Pink	— Rear Door Module
J4 25	Amp Natural	— Driver Door Node
J5 25	Amp Natural	— Passenger Door Node
J6 40	Amp Green	— Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control System
J7 30	Amp Pink	— Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability Control System

580MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
J8 40	Amp Green	— Power	er Memory Seat – If Equipped
J9 40	Amp Green	— Partial	Zero Emissions Vehicle Motor/Flex Fuel – If Equipped
J10 30	Amp Pink	— Headlamp	Wash/Manifold Tuning Valve – If Equipped
J11 30	Amp Pink	— Power	er Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft Module – If Equipped
J12 30	Amp Pink		HVAC Rear Blower, Radiator Fan Motor
J13 60	Amp Yellow	— Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
J14 40	Amp Green	— Rear	Window Defog-ger
J15 40	Amp Green	— Front	Blower
J17 40	Amp Green	— Starter	Solenoid
J18 20	Amp Blue	— Powertrain Control Module Trans Range
J19 60	Amp Yellow	— Radiator Fan
J20 30	Amp Pink	— Front Wiper LO/HI
J21 20	Amp Blue	— Front/Rear Washer
J22 25	Amp Natural	— Sunroof Module

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE581

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
M1 —	15 Amp	Blue	Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch
M2 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Trailer Lighting, Front Fog Lamps, Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
M3 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Front/Rear Axle Locker, Vacuum Pump Motor
M4 —	10 Amp	Red	Trailer Tow
M5 —	25 Amp	Natural	Inverter

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
M6 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor, Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel or with Console Rear)
M7 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) – Center Seat or with Console Rear
M8 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Front Heated Seat – If Equipped
M9 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped

582MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
M10 —	15 Amp	Blue	Ignition Off Draw —Video System, Satellite Radio, DVD, Hands-Free Module, Universal Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp, Streaming Video Module – If Equipped
M11 —	10 Amp	Red	Climate Control System
M12 —	30 Amp	Green	Amplifier/Radio
M13 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Instrument Cluster, SIREN, Clock Module, Multi-Function Control Switch – If Equipped

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
M14 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Trailer Tow – If Equipped
M15 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Rear View Mirror, Instrument Cluster, Multi-Function Control Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug Module – If Equipped
M16 —	10 Amp	Red	Airbag Module/ Occupant Classification Module
M17 —	15 Amp	Blue	Left Tail/License/ Park Lamp, Running Lamps
M18 —	15 Amp	Blue	Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE583

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
M19 —	25 Amp	Natural	Powertrain
M20 —	15 Amp	Blue	Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch Bank, Steering Column Module, Switch Steering Wheel
M21 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Powertrain
M22 —	10 Amp	Red	Horn
M23 —	10 Amp	Red	Horn
M24 —	25 Amp	Natural	Rear Wiper

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
M25 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – If Equipped
M26 —	10 Amp	Red	Power Mirror Switch, Driver Window Switch
M27 —	10 Amp	Red	Wireless Control Module, Keyless Entry Module
M28 —	10 Amp	Red	Powertrain, Transmission Control Module
M29 —	10 Amp	Red	Occupant Classification Module
M30 —	15 Amp	Blue	Rear Wiper Module, Power Folding Mirror
M31 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Back-Up Lamps

584MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
M32 —	10 Amp	Red	Airbag Module,THATCHUM – IfEquipped
M33 —	10 Amp	Red	Powertrain
M34 —	10 Amp	Red	Park Assist, Heater Climate Control Module, Headlamp Wash, Compass, Rear Camera, Door Lamps,Flashlight, Relay Diesel Cabin Heater, Rad Fan Diesel – IfEquipped
M35 —	10 Amp	Red	Heated Mirrors

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
M36 —	20 Amp	Yellow	Power Outlet #3 (Instrument Panel or with Console Center)
M37 —	10 Amp	Red	Antilock Brakes, Stability Control, Stop Lamp, Fuel Pump
M38 —	25 Amp	Natural	Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/Unlock Motors

The heated mirrors, lower instrument panel power outlet and removable floor console, when in the front position are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The power seats are fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver's seat. The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker located under the instrument panel near the

steering column. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.

VEHICLESTORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may do the following:

• Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENTBULBS

LIGHTBULBS-InteriorBulbNumber

Center & Rear Dome Lamp 578

Center & Rear Reading Lamps 578

Front Door Courtesy Lamp. 578

Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped ..... 5 7 8

Instrument Cluster Lamps P C 7 4

Liftgate Lamp(s) 578

Overhead Console Reading Lamps ..... P C 5 7 9

Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped ..... 194

Visor Vanity Lamps. 6 5 0 1 9 6 6

NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.

All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.

586MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

LIGHTBULBS-ExteriorBulbNumber

Headlamp....H 1 1

Fog Lamp - If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . P S X 2 4 W

Front Side Marker, Park/

Turn Signal 3757AorPY27/7W

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . L E D

(ServicedatAuthorizedDealer)

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp ..... L E D

(ServicedatAuthorizedDealer)

Backup Lamp 3157

License. 168

BULBREPLACEMENT

Headlamps

1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp housing.

2. Slide the red lock tab rearward on the connector, then depress the tab and remove the connector from the bulb.

^3 . Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the headlamp housing.

1. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked into the headlamp housing.

CAUTION!

Donottouchthenewbulbwithyourfingers.Oil contaminationwillseverelyshortenbulblife.Ifthe bulbcomesincontactwithanoilysurface,cleanthe bulbwithrubbingalcohol.

1. Connect the wiring connector to bulb and slide red lock tab forward.

FrontPark/TurnSignalLamps

1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp housing.
2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp housing.

FogLamps

NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam.

1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on the air dam, squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and pull straight out from the fog lamp.

CAUTION!

Donottouchthenewbulbwithyourfingers.Oil contaminationwillseverelyshortenbulblife.Ifthe bulbcomesincontactwithanoilysurface,cleanthe bulbwithrubbingalcohol.

1. Disconnect the wire harness from the bulb.
2. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and reinstall by inserting the new bulb straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place.

588MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

RearTail,Stop,TurnSignal,SideMarkerand BackupLamps

1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to disengage the two ball studs.

Interior view of a car showing dashboard and seat components with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

073310812

NOTE:

• If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint.

• The PRY location is best closest to the studs while dislodging them separately.

• Twist the socket and remove from the lamp assembly.

• Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
• Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the lamp assembly.

CenterHigh-MountedStopLamp(CHMSL)

The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly. See your authorized dealer.

LicenseLamp

The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light bar and above the license plate.

1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal.

2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly and pull the bulb out to remove.

3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure.

FLUIDCAPACITIES

U.S.Metric
Fuel(Approximate)20 Gallons 76 Liters
EngineOilwithFilter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
CoolingSystem*
3.6L Engine (MOPAR®Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear heater.

590MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTSANDGENUINEPARTS

Engine

ComponentFluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant	MOPAR®Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil	Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.

Spark Plugs RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])

Fuel Selection 87 Octane

Chassis

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Automatic Transmission	MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4® product.
Brake Master Cylinder	MOPAR®DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir	MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4® product.

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

CONTENTS

■Maintenance Schedule 594

□Required Maintenance Intervals....596

594MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCESCHEDULE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, "Change Oil" will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed. Depending on operating conditions, the message may appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES595

NOTE:

• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

AtEachStopForFuel

• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut OFF. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MIN mark.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.

596MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

OnceAMonth

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and the power steering and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.

AtEachOilChange

• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Open the left and right door (slowly) and inspect for excessive dirt. If noise exist wipe clean and apply krytox lube to the door rollers.

CAUTION!

Failuretoperformtherequiredmaintenanceitems mayresultindamagetothevehicle.

RequiredMaintenanceIntervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

8,000Miles(13,000km)or 6MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 8,000 miles (13000km).

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

16,000Miles(26,000km)or12MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 16,000 miles (26000 km).
□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.
□Replacetheairconditioningfilter.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
☐Inspectexhaustsystem.Performthefirstinspectionat16,000miles(26000km)or 12months.
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

598MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

24,000Miles(39,000km)or 18MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 24,000 miles (39000km).
□InspecttheCVjoints.
□Inspectexhaustsystem.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

32,000Miles(52,000km)or24MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 32,000 miles (52000 km).
☐Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.
☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

40,000Miles(65,000km)or 30MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 40,000 miles (65000 km).

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

48,000Miles(78,000km)or36MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 48,000 miles (78000 km).
□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.
□Replacetheairconditioningfilter.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
□InspecttheCVjoints.
□Inspectexhaustsystem.
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

600MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

56,000Miles(91,000km)or 42MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 56,000 miles (91000 km).

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

64,000Miles(104,000km)or48MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

☐Rotatethetires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104000 km).

☐Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter.

□Inspectthebrakelinings;replaceifnecessary.

☐Changetheautomatictransmissionfluidandfilter(s)ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthe following:police,taxi,fleet,orfrequenttrailertowing.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

72,000Miles(117,000km)or 54MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 72,000 miles (117000 km).
□InspecttheCVjoints.
□Inspectexhaustsystem.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

80,000Miles(130,000km)or60MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignofirregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 80,000miles(130000km).
□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.
☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter.
☐Flushandreplaceenginecoolantat60monthsor104,000miles(169000km)whichever comesfirst.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

602MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

88,000Miles(143,000km)or 66MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 88,000 miles (143000km).

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

96,000Miles(156,000km)or72MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

☐Rotatethetires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156000 km).

□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter.

☐Replacethesparkplugs(3.6LEngine).

□InspectandreplacePCVvalveifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

104,000Miles(169,000km)or 78MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 104,000miles(169000km).
☐Flushandreplacetheenginecoolantat 104,000miles(169000km)or60months whichevercomesfirst.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

112,000Miles(182,000km)or84MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 112,000 miles (182000 km).
□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.
☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

604MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

120,000Miles(195,000km)or 90MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 120,000 miles (195000 km).
□InspecttheCVjoints.
□Inspectexhaustsystem.
☐Changetheautomatictransmissionfluid andfilter(s).

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

128,000Miles(208,000km)or96MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 128,000 miles (208000 km).
☐Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.
☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper loosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

136,000Miles(221,000km)or 102MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 136,000 miles (221000km).

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

144,000Miles(234,000km)or108MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
☐Rotatethetires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 144,000 miles (234000 km).
□Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter;replaceifnecessary.
☐Replacetheairconditioningfilter.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
□InspecttheCVjoints.
□Inspectexhaustsystem.
☐ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improperloosenessorendplay; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

606MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

152,000Miles(247,000km)or 114MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

☐Rotatethetires, rotateatthefirstsignof irregularwear, evenifitoccursbefore 152,000 miles (247000km).

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature, AuthorizedServiceCenter

WARNING!

• Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Doonlyserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtherightequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperform aservicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetent mechanic.
• Failuretoproperlyinspectandmaintainyour vehiclecouldresultinacomponentmalfunction andeffectvehiclehandlingandperformance.This couldcauseanaccident.

IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle.... 6 1 1

□Prepare For The Appointment.... 6 1 1

□Prepare A List....611

□Be Reasonable With Requests....611

■If You Need Assistance....611

□ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 612

□ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 612

□ In Mexico Contact 612

□Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)....613

□Service Contract 613

■ Warranty Information 614

■ MOPAR® Parts 614

■ Reporting Safety Defects 614

□In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. 614

□ In Canada 615

■ Publication Order Forms 615

610IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

■Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire

Quality Grades 617

□Treadwear....617

□Traction Grades 617

□Temperature Grades....618

SUGGESTIONSFOROBTAININGSERVICEFOR YOURVEHICLE

PrepareForTheAppointment

If you're having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

PrepareAList

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

BeReasonableWithRequests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IFYOUNEEDASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

612IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer's service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

- Owner's name and address

- Owner's telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealership name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

ChryslerGroupLLCCustomerCenter

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Phone: [phone]

ChryslerCanadaInc.CustomerCenter

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone] English / [phone] French

InMexicocontact:

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

IF YOU NEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE613

CustomerAssistanceForTheHearingOrSpeech Impaired(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

ServiceContract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

614IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You'll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engineexhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, ormit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain product of component wear contain, ormit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTYINFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR®PARTS

MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTINGSAFETYDEFECTS

Inthe50UnitedStatesandWashington,D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

InCanada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

PUBLICATIONORDERFORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

616IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

• ServiceManuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

• DiagnosticProcedureManuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

- Owner'sManuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Calltollfreeat:

• 1-800-890-4038(U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143(Canada)

Or

VisitusontheWorldwideWebat:

- www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENTOFTRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIREQUALITYGRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

TractionGrades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon straight-aheadbrakingtractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

618IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

TemperatureGrades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablished for atirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded. Excessivespeed,under-inflation,orexcessiveloading,eitherseparatelyorincombination,cancause heatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.

INDEX

620INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze)....564

Adding Fuel 490

Adding Washer Fluid 561

Additives, Fuel 484

Adjustable Pedals....2 1 0

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 553

Air Conditioner Maintenance....5 5 7

Air Conditioning....393

Air Conditioning Controls....3 9 3

Air Conditioning Filter....413,558

Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..... 5 5 7

Air Conditioning System....393,400,557

Air Conditioning System, Zone Control ..... 3 9 3

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..... 4 1 3

Air Conditioning, Rear Zone 398,408

Air Pressure, Tires 462

Airbag 70,79

Airbag Deployment 81

Airbag Light 77,83,101,293

Airbag Maintenance 82

Airbag, Side 74,76,79

Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ..... 74,76,79

Alarm (Security Alarm)....17

Alarm Light 294

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle 7

Antenna, Satellite Radio 343

Anti-Lock Warning Light 289

Anti-Theft System 17

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 563,589

Disposal 565

Appearance Care 571

Ashtray 253

Assist, Hill Start 4 4 9

Assistance Towing....139

Auto Down Power Windows 39

Auto Up Power Windows 39

Automatic Dimming Mirror 112

Automatic Door Locks....35

INDEX621

Automatic Headlights....199

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..... 4 0 0

Automatic Transaxle Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 9 1

Automatic Transmission....422,569

Adding Fluid 571

Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 1

Fluid Change 571

Fluid Level Check 571

Fluid Type 570,591

Gear Ranges 427

Special Additives....570

B-Pillar Location 457

Battery 556

Jump Starting 532

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 2 6

Saving Feature (Protection) 204

Belts, Seat 101

Blind Spot Monitoring ..... 1 1 7

Body Mechanism Lubrication 560

Brake Assist System 4 4 4

Brake Control System, Electronic 4 4 3

Brake Fluid 591

Brake System 567

Fluid Check 568

Parking 439

Warning Light 294

Brake/Transmission Interlock 4 2 4

Brakes 567

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ..... 9 8

Bulb Replacement 586

Bulbs, Light 103,585

Calibration, Compass 314

Camera, Rear 2 2 4

Capacities, Fluid 589

INDEX

Caps, Filler

Fuel 490

Oil (Engine) 5 5 2

Power Steering. 438

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) 565

Car Washes 572

Carbon Monoxide Warning ..... 100,486

Cargo (Vehicle Loading) 2 6 0

Cargo Compartment Luggage Carrier ..... 2 7 1

Caution, Exhaust Gas 51

Cellular Phone....125,392

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5 8 8

Chains, Tire 470

Changing A Flat Tire 514

Chart, Tire Sizing 45

Check Engine Light

(Malfunction Indicator Light)....291,547

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..... 9 9

Checks, Safety 99

Child Restraint 85,86,87

Child Restraint Tether Anchors 90

Child Safety Locks 46

Child Seat 89

Clean Air Gasoline 482

Cleaning Wheels 573

Climate Control 393

Clock....323,332

Coat Hook 260

Coin Holder 261

Cold Weather Operation 420

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance 392

Compact Spare Tire 465

Compass 313

Compass Calibration 314

Compass Variance....3 1 4

Computer, Trip/Travel 3 11

INDEX623

Connector

U C I 346

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..... 3 4 6

Conserving Fuel....310

Console 261

Console, Floor 261

Console, Overhead 2 2 7

Console, Removable....265

Contract, Service 613

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..... 5 6 5

Cooling System 562

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)....564

Coolant Capacity 589

Coolant Level....562,565

Disposal of Used Coolant....5 6 5

Drain, Flush, and Refill ..... 5 6 3

Inspection 565

Points to Remember....566

Pressure Cap 565

Radiator Cap 565

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 563,589,590

Cupholders 250,577

Customer Assistance 611

Data Recorder, Event 84

Daytime Running Lights 200

Dealer Service 549

Defroster, Rear Window ..... 2 6 9

Defroster, Windshield 101,406

Diagnostic System, Onboard 546

Dimmer Control 201

Dipsticks

Automatic Transmission....571

Oil (Engine) 5 5 0

Power Steering 438

Disabled Vehicle Towing 539

624INDEX

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 5 6 5

Engine Oil 5 5 2

Door Locks 32

Door Locks, Automatic ..... 3 5

Door Opener, Garage 231

Driving

On Slippery Surfaces 4 3 4

Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water 43

Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 3 1 0

E-85 Fuel 486

Economy (Fuel) Mode 4 2 5

Electric Remote Mirrors....1 1 4

Electrical Power Outlets 244

Electronic Brake Control System ..... 4 4 3

Brake Assist System 4 4 4

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 2 1 2

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 4 4 5

Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) 224,300

Emergency, In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher....513

Jacking....514,523

Jump Starting 532

Overheating 513

Emission Control System Maintenance ..... 5 4 7

Engine

Air Cleaner 553

Block Heater 422

Break-In Recommendations 98

Checking Oil Level 550

Compartment 545

Compartment Identification 545

Coolant (Antifreeze) 590

Cooling 562

Exhaust Gas Caution 51,100,486

INDEX625

Flooded, Starting 420

Fuel Requirements 482,589

Oil 550,589,590

Oil Change Interval 5 5 1

Oil Disposal 5 5 2

Oil Filler Cap 5 5 2

Oil Filter Disposal 5 5 2

Oil Selection 551,589

Oil Synthetic 552

Overheating 513

Starting 419

Temperature Gauge 296 Flashers

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . 8 0

Entry System, Illuminated 19

Ethanol 48

Event Data Recorder 84

Exhaust Gas Caution 51,100,486

Exhaust System....100,554

Extender, Seat Belt 70

Exterior Folding Mirrors 1 1 4

Exterior Lights 103

Fabric Care 574

Filler Location Fuel 293

Filters

Air Cleaner 5 5 3

Air Conditioning 413,558

Engine Oil 552,590

Engine Oil Disposal 5 5 2

Flash-To-Pass 204

Flashers

Hazard Warning 513

Turn Signal 103,286,587,588

Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Cruising Range 489

Engine Oil 489

Fuel Requirements 486,488

Maintenance 490

626INDEX

Replacement Parts 490

Starting 489

Flooded Engine Starting 4 2 0

Floor Console 261

Fluid Capacities 589

Fluid Leaks 103

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transmission....571

Brake 568

Power Steering 438

Fluids 590

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..... 5 9 0

Fog Light Service 587

Fog Lights 200,286,587

Fold in Floor (Stow 'n Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 2

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 536

Fuel 482

Adding....490

Additives....484

Clean Air 482

Conserving 310

Economy Mode 425

Ethanol 483

Filler Cap (Gas Cap)....293,490

Filler Door (Gas Cap) 293

Gasoline 482

Gauge 293

Light 297,306

Materials Added 484

Methanol 483

Octane Rating 590

Requirements 482,589

Saver Mode 310

Tank Capacity 589

Fuel Optimizer....310

Fuel Saver 310

Fuel, Flexible 486

Fueling 490

INDEX627

Fuses 578

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)....231

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ..... 490,492,546

Gasoline (Fuel) 482

Conserving 310

Gasoline, Clean Air 482

Gasoline, Reformulated 482

Gauges

Coolant Temperature....296

Fuel 293

Speedometer 293

Tachometer 286

Gear Ranges 427

Gear Select Lever Override....537

General Information....17,28,155,481

Glass Cleaning 576

Gross Axle Weight Rating 493,496

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..... 493,495

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) 125

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow

Standing Water 435

Hazard Warning Flasher 513

Head Restraints 167

Headlights

Bulb Replacement 586

Cleaning 575

Lights On Reminder 200

Passing 204

Replacing....586

Time Delay 199

Washers 199

Heated Mirrors.... 11 5

Heated Seats 163

Heater 393

Heater, Engine Block 422

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 204

628INDEX

Hill Start Assist 449

Hitches Trailer Towing....500

HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 231

Hood Release....196

Hook, Coat....260

Ignition 14
Key 12,1

Ignition Key Removal 14

Illuminated Entry 19

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) 15

Infant Restraint 85

Information Center, Vehicle 300

Inside Rearview Mirror....1 1 2

Instrument Cluster 284,286

Instrument Panel and Controls 283

Instrument Panel Cover 574

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ..... 5 7 6

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ..... 5 7 8

Interior Appearance Care 574

Interior Lights 201

Introduction 4

Jack Location 515

Jack Operation 514

Jump Starting 532

Key-In Reminder 15

Key, Programming 17

Key, Replacement....16

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) 15

Keyless Entry System 20

Keys 12

Lane Change Assist 204

Lap/Shoulder Belts 5 5

INDEX629

LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) ..... 9 0

Latches....103

Hood 196

Lead Free Gasoline 482

Leaks, Fluid 103

Life of Tires 468

Liftgate 48

Light Bulbs 103

Lights 103,198

Airbag 77,83,101,293

Alarm 294

Anti-Lock 289

Automatic Headlights 199

Back-Up 588

Battery Saver 204

Brake Assist Warning 4 4 8

Brake Warning 294

Bulb Replacement....585,586

Center Mounted Stop 588

Daytime Running 200

Dimmer Switch, Headlight 201

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 448

Engine Temperature Warning ..... 2 9 8

Exterior....103

Fog 200,286,587

Hazard Warning Flasher 513

Headlights 586

Headlights On Reminder 200

High Beam Indicator 286

High Beam/Low Beam Select 204

Illuminated Entry 19

Interior 201

License 589

Lights On Reminder 200

Low Fuel 297,306

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..... 2 9 1

Oil Pressure 297

630INDEX

Park 587

Passing 204

Reading 228

Rear Servicing 588

Rear Tail 588

Seat Belt Reminder 296

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ..... 2 9 4

Service 585,586

Service Engine Soon

(Malfunction Indicator) 291

Side Marker 588

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm)....294

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ..... 2 8 9

Traction Control 448

Turn Signal 103,587,588

Voltage 29

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ... 286

Load Leveling System 270

Loading Vehicle 260,492,494

Capacities 494

Tires....457

Locks

Automatic Door 35

Door 32

Lower Anchors and Tether for

CHildren (LATCH) 90

Lubrication, Body 560

Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) 271

Maintenance Free Battery 5 5 6

Maintenance Procedures 549

Maintenance Schedule 594

Maintenance, Sunroof 244

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 291,547

Manual,Service 615

Map/Reading Lights 2 2 8

Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ..... 1 9 2

INDEX 631

Memory Seat....1 15,192

Methanol 483

Mini-Trip Computer 311

Mirrors 112

Automatic Dimming....1 1 2

Electric Remote 1 1 4

Exterior Folding....1 1 4

Heated....1 1 5

Memory 192

Outside....1 1 3

Rearview 112

Vanity 116

Mode Fuel Saver....3 1 0

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..... 7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7 3

Mopar Parts 549,614

MTBE/ETBE 483

Multi-Function Control Lever 203

Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) 2 2 4

New Vehicle Break-In Period 98

Occupant Restraints 52,76,81

Occupant Restraints (Sedan)....74,76,79

Odometer 286

Oil Change Indicator 288,289,309

Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . 288,289,309

Oil, Engine....550,590

Capacity 589

Change Interval 551

Checking....5 5 0

Disposal 552

Filter 552,590

Filter Disposal 5 5 2

Identification Logo 5 5 1

Materials Added to 552

Recommendation....551,589

Synthetic....5 5 2

Viscosity 552,589

Onboard Diagnostic System....546,547

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ..... 2 3 1

Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) ..... 4

Outside Rearview Mirrors....1 12,113

Overhead Console 227

Overhead Travel Information Center ..... 2 2 7

Overheating, Engine 296,513

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ..... 4,615

Panic Alarm 23

Park Sense System, Rear 215

Parking Brake 439

Pedals, Adjustable 210

Personal Settings 315

Pets, Transporting 95

Phone, Cellular 125

Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) 125

Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..... 4 5 7

Power

Door Locks 34

Lift Gate 49

Mirrors 114

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..... 2 4 4

Seats 160

Sliding Door 42

Steering 437,438

Sunroof 241

Windows....36

Power Steering Fluid 591

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 69

Preparation for Jacking 522

Pretensioners

Seat Belts 64

Programmable Electronic Features ..... 3 1 5

[Non-Text]

Radial Ply Tires 464

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..... 562,565

INDEX 633

Radio Operation....3 9 2 Replacement Parts ....5 4 9
Radio Remote Controls 390 Replacement Tires 469
Rear Air Conditioning....398,408 Reporting Safety Defects....614
Rear Camera 2 2 4 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 288,289,309
Rear Cross Path....1 2 3 Restraint, Head....1 6 7
Rear Heater 398 Restraints, Child 85,89
Rear Park Sense System 2 1 5 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 536
Rear Window Defroster....269 Roof Rack (Luggage Rack)....271
Rearview Mirrors....1 1 2 Rotation, Tires....4 7 2
Reclining Front Seats 167
Recorder, Event Data 84 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 101
Recreational Towing 509 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 103
Reformulated Gasoline 4 8 2 Safety Defects, Reporting 6 1 4
Reminder, Seat Belt 68 Safety Information, Tire 452
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)....20 Safety Tips....99
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ..... 3 9 0 Safety, Exhaust Gas ..... 51,100
Remote Starting System 29 Satellite Radio Antenna 343
Removable Floor Console 2 6 5Schedule, Maintenance 5 9 4
Replacement Keys 16 Seat Belt Maintenance 576

634INDEX

Seat Belt Reminder 68

Seat Belts 52,101

Adjustable Shoulder Belt 6 1

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 6 1

And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 9

Child Restraint 85,87

Extender 70

Front Seat 5 5

Inspection....101

Pretensioners 64

Rear Seat 5 5

Seats 160

Adjustment....166

Fold in Floor (Stow'n G o ) 17

Heated 163

Memory 192

Power 160

Reclining....167

Stow'n Go (Fold in Floor)....172

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) 17

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)....563,590

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 15

Sentry Key Programming....17

Sentry Key Replacement....16

Service Assistance....6 1 1

Service Contract 613

Service Engine Soon Light

(Malfunction Indicator) 291

Service Manuals 615

Setting the Clock 323,332

Settings, Personal 315

Shift Lever Override 537

Short Message Service (SMS) 147

Shoulder Belts 55

Side Airbag 79

Signals, Turn ..... 103,203,286,587,588

Sliding Door 41

Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 3 4

INDEX635

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) 470

Snow Tires 472

Spare Tire 465,466,516

Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 2 1 2

Speedometer 29

Starting 419

Automatic Transmission 419

Cold Weather 420

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2 0

Remote 29

Starting and Operating 419

Starting Procedures....419

Steering Power 437,438

Tilt Column 208

Wheel, Heated 209

Wheel, Tilt 208

Steering Wheel Audio Controls 390

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 390

Storage 254,585

Storage Bin 254

Storage, Vehicle 412,585 Storing Your Vehicle 5 8 5

Stow'n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats....172

Sun Roof 241

Sunglasses Storage 228

Sunroof Maintenance 244

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..... 7 0

Synthetic Engine Oil 552

System, Remote Starting 29

Tachometer 286

Telescoping Steering Column 208

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) 400

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ..... 296,514

Tether Anchor, Child Restraint 90

636INDEX

Text Messaging....147

Tilt Steering Column 208

Tire and Loading Information Placard ..... 4 5 7

Tire Identification Number (TIN) 4 5 5

Tire Markings 452

Tire Safety Information 452

Tires 103,461,617

Aging (Life of Tires) 4 6 8

Air Pressure 461

Chains 470

Changing 514

Compact Spare 465

General Information 461

High Speed 463

Inflation Pressures 462

Jacking 514,523

Life of Tires 468

Load Capacity 457,458

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ..... 4 7 3

Pressure Warning Light 289

Quality Grading 617

Radial....464

Replacement 469

Rotation 472

Safety 452,461

Sizes 453

Snow Tires 472

Spare Tire 516

Spinning 467

Tread Wear Indicators 468

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight 502

Towing 495

24-Hour Towing Assistance....139

Disabled Vehicle 539

Guide 501

Recreational 509

Weight 501

Towing Assistance....139

INDEX637

Traction Control 4 4 3 Transporting Pets 9 5

Traction Control Switch 4 4 3 Tread Wear Indicators 4 6 8

Trailer Towing 495 Trip Odometer 286

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 0 8 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,286,587,588

Hitches 500

Minimum Requirements....503 UCI Connector....346

Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 0 2 Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 5

Wiring....506 Umbrella Holder....256

Trailer Towing Guide 501 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 617

Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 0 1 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 346

Transaxle Universal Transmitter 231

Selection of Lubricant 591 Unleaded Gasoline 482

Transmission....569 Upholstery Care ....574

Automatic 422,569

Fluid 570,591 Vanity Mirrors 11 6

Transmitter Battery Service Variance, Compass 314

(Remote Keyless Entry)....26 Vehicle Certification Label ....492

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .. 231 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..... 6

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..... 2 0 Vehicle Loading ..... 458,492,494

638INDEX

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..... 7

Vehicle Storage 412,585

Voice Recognition System (VR) ..... 1 5 5

Warning Flasher, Hazard 513

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description)....286

Warnings and Cautions 6

Warranty Information 614

Washer Adding Fluid .... 5 6 1

Washing Vehicle 572

Water Driving Through 435

Wheel and Wheel Trim....573

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 573

Wind Buffeting 41,243

Window Fogging 412

Windows.... 36 Power.... 36

Rear Vent....36

Windshield Defroster....101

Windshield Washers 204,561

Windshield Wiper Blades 560

Wiper Blade Replacement 560

Wipers, Intermittent 204

Zone Control (Temperature Control) ..... 3 9 3

INSTALLATION OF RADIOTRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT

Specialdesignconsiderationsareincorporatedinto this vehicle'selectronicsystemtoprovideimmunitytoradio frequencysignals.Mobiletwo-wayradiosandtelephone equipmentmustbeinstalledproperlybytrainedpersonnel. The followingmustbeobservedduringinstallation.

The positive power connections should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. Then negative power connections should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be refused.

Antennasfortwo-wayradiosshouldbemountedontheroof ortherearareaofthevehicle.Careshouldbeusedin mountingantennaswithmagnetbases.Magnetsmayaffect theaccuracyoroperationofthecompassonvehiclesso equipped.

Theantennacableshouldbeasshortaspracticaland routedawayfromthevehiclewiringwhenpossible. Use onlyfullyshieldedcoaxialcable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to other radioto ensure low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobileradioequipmentwithoutputpowergreaterthan normalmayrequirespecialprecautions.

All installation should be checked for possible interference between the communication equipment and the vehicle's electronics systems.

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS"

Chrysler Group LLC

12MZZ-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

Abstract pattern of horizontal black and white stripes with no text or symbols